1. business and industrial
2. construction

Specifications and Project Manual
for
Renovations to the
GEORGIAN HALL & ORIGINAL SCHOOLHOUSE
WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
at
ROOSEVELT WARM SPRINGS, GEORGIA
for the
Georgia Department of Labor
148 Andrew Young Industrial Boulevard, N.E.
Atlanta, Georgia 30303
Project Number DOL-21
Architects
Barker, Cunningham, Barrington, P. C.,
Architects
4335 South Lee Street, Suite E
Buford, Georgia 30518
770/271-3335
Mechanical & Electrical
Minick Engineering, Inc.
3585 Habersham
Tucker, Georgia 30084
770/491-7848
Issued September, 2010, Architect’s Project Number BCB1011
Copyright 2010 Barker, Cunningham, Barrington, P. C., Architects
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
NOT USED
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100
01140
01250
01290
01310
01330
01351
01400
01420
01524
01600
01700
01731
01732
01770
01781
01782
01820
SUMMARY
WORK RESTRICTIONS
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
REFERENCES
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
CUTTING AND PATCHING
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
02300
02920
02930
EARTHWORK
LAWNS AND GRASSES
EXTERIOR PLANTS
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300
CONCRETE
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
04901
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05521
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100
06200
06402
ROUGH CARPENTRY
FINISH CARPENTRY
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1
BCB1011
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210
07920
BUILDING INSULATION
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08212
08331
08711
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
DOOR HARDWARE
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09210
09260
09310
09385
09512
09681
09900
GYPSUM PLASTER
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
CERAMIC TILE
DIMENSION STONE TILE
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
CARPET TILES
PAINTING
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10155
10801
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
NOT USED
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
12494
ROLLER SHADES
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOT USED
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NOT USED
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
15010
15040
15060
15180
15400
15650
15800
15900
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
TEST, ADJUST AND BALANCE
PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
INSULATION
PLUMBING
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION
AUTOMATIC CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2
BCB1011
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16010
16100
16400
16450
16500
16750
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
BASIS MATERIALS AND METHODS
ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING
LIGHTING FIXTURES
MISC. SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS - 3
BCB1011
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Project Identification: Project consists of Selective Demolition, Interior Renovations and Restoration
Operations to the Georgian Hall and the Original Schoolhouse at Roosevelt Warm Springs, Georgia
1.
2.
Project Location: Roosevelt Warm Springs, Warm Springs, Georgia
Owner: Georgia Department of Labor
B.
Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, Dated August 2010, were prepared for the
Project by Barker, Cunningham, Barrington, P. C., Architects.
C.
The Work consists of selective demolition of interior construction, interior renovation and restoration
including but not limited to normal GWB systems, carpeting, lay-in ceilings, plaster repair and
restoration, painting, normal electrical, plumbing and HVAC systems
1.3
CONTRACT
A.
1.4
The work of this project will be constructed under a single general construction contract.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises indicated for construction operations,
including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of indicated premises is
limited by Owner's ongoing operations and right to perform work or to retain other contractors on
portions of Project. The contractor shall minimize all construction operations outside of indicated
areas so as to not impair owner’s full use of existing facilities.
B.
The Contractor’s hours of operation are limited to 7:00 AM through 6:00 PM, prevailing time,
Monday through Saturday.
1.5
WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A.
1.6
Cooperate fully with the Owner’s separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried
out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
SUMMARY
01100 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
B.
Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help
cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the
beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract
Documents.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents
is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but
not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as
plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of
the Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity
to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when
so noted.
a.
1.7
BCB1011
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
SUMMARY
01100 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01140 - WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond
areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.3
Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas indicated on the drawings.
Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner and Owner’s Guest’s occupancy and full use of existing
developed site and existing buildings throughout the construction period including areas
adjacent to scheduled construction operations.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep existing driveways and entrances serving premises clear
and available to Owner, Owner's employees, Owner’s Guests and emergency vehicles at all
times. Do not use these areas for construction activities, worker parking, staging or storage
of materials. The Owner will designate parking for workers and space for storage of
construction materials.
Working hours are restricted to 7:00 AM through 6:00 PM, Mondays through Saturdays.
Construction activities before or after these times and on are prohibited.
Work in Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction and renovation period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect the
building, furnishings and occupants during construction period.
OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy currently developed site and existing buildings
scheduled for renovations during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during
construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as
not to interfere with Owner's operations.
B.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment
in completed areas of the new construction, before Material Completion, provided such occupancy
does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy
shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.
2.
3.
Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational,
and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. Upon occupancy, Owner
will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied
portions of building.
Upon occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for
occupied portions of building.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
01140 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS
01140 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing
allowances.
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after Contract award.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
1.4
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving
adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's
Supplemental Instructions."
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Proposal Requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Within time specified in Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments
to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a.
b.
c.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of
the Contract Time.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01250 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.5
BCB1011
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount
of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate
quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and
activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract
Time.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
1.6
On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A.
Construction Change Directive: The Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA
Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in
the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.
B.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also
designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract
Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01250
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01250 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum
to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for
Payment.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
1.
Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and
schedules, including the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
B.
Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
Submittals Schedule.
Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than ten days
before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased
payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a.
b.
Project name and location.
Name of Architect.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
c.
d.
e.
2.
Architect's project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Related Specification Section or Division.
Description of the Work.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
Name of supplier.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
Dollar value.
1)
3.
4.
5.
7.
1.5
Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence
of insurance or bonded warehousing if stored off-site.
Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a.
8.
Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to
total 100 percent.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation
of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table
of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and
stored, but not yet installed.
a.
6.
BCB1011
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in
a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1.
B.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Material Completion, and
final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the First day of each month.
The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the
preceding period and ends Five days before the date for each progress payment.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
C.
Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1.
2.
E.
Transmittal: Submit Five signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within two working days. One copy shall include waivers of
lien and similar attachments as required.
1.
F.
2.
3.
4.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage,
on each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide
with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
H.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens
from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the
previous application.
1.
G.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of Values.
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Products list.
Schedule of unit prices.
Submittals Schedule.
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Copies of building permits.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of
the Work.
Initial progress report.
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Performance and payment bonds.
Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.
Application for Payment at Material Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Material Completion,
submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed
as materially complete.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
I.
BCB1011
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is materially complete and a statement
showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Material Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that
taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
Evidence that claims have been settled.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date
of Material Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for
corresponding elements of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General project coordination procedures.
Conservation.
Coordination Drawings.
Administrative and supervisory personnel.
Project meetings.
B.
Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will
be assigned to a specific contractor.
C.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control
points.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications
to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction
operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation,
connection, and operation.
B.
Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its’ construction operations with those of other
contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each
contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend
on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or
after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01310 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
C.
If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of
attendees at meetings.
1.
D.
1.4
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work
is required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures
with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure
orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
BCB1011
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Pre-installation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates
maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is
required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.5
Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing
requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
Staff Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify
individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including
home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A.
General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
1.
1.6
Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01310 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
B.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting
dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 5 days of the meeting.
Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction,
at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the
Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the
meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1.
2.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor
and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
C.
BCB1011
Tentative construction schedule.
Phasing.
Critical work sequencing.
Designation of responsible personnel.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of Record Documents.
Use of the premises.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Working hours.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
2.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of
scheduled meeting dates.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular
activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Contract Documents.
Options.
Related Change Orders.
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
Review of mockups.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility problems.
Time schedules.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01310 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
3.
4.
D.
BCB1011
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Required performance results.
Protection of construction and personnel.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and
reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings initially at two week intervals. Coordinate dates
of meetings with preparation of payment requests. Progress meeting schedule will be coordinated
to the pace of the work as the project progresses.
1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
b.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind
schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so.
Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
3.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should
have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the
previous meeting and report.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01310 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
a.
E.
BCB1011
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress
meetings and pre-installation conferences.
1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion
as appropriate to status of Project.
a.
b.
c.
Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are
required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the
Contract Time.
Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each
coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
3.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to
others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01310 - 5
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment.
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination
Drawings.
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and
Delegated-Design Submittals.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record
Documents and operation and maintenance manuals.
Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual
requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals
may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect
for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction
activities.
1.
2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
a.
BCB1011
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with
other submittals until related submittals are received.
C.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related
construction activities.
D.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will
advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is required, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals
may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmittal
to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.
If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
Allow 15 days for processing each resubmittal.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals
enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space approximately 4 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Unique identifier, including revision number.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
F.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on
submittals.
G.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect
observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as
final submittal.
1.
2.
H.
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies
to Architect.
Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and
will be returned.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from
sources other than Contractor.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
BCB1011
On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous
submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor
variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal.
Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Project name.
Date.
Destination (To:).
Source (From:).
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Remarks.
Signature of transmitter.
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in
connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1.
2.
Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return three copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record
Document.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
a.
b.
B.
Initial Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of each submittal where selection
of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required. Architect will
return submittal with options selected.
Final Submittal: Submit four copies, unless copies are required for operation and
maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation
and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain one copy; remainder will be returned.
Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type
of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not
suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
C.
BCB1011
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Standard color charts.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Mill reports.
Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
3.
4.
Dimensions.
Identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Design calculations.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
Number of Copies: Submit a number of copies in order for the Architect to retain one, the
engineer (as applicable) to retain one and as many additional copies as the general
contractor wants returned.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and
Coordination."
E.
Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from
the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and
texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial
sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials;
complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern;
color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
4.
Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of
qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach
label on unexposed side that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
5.
b.
8.
b.
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of
use.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property,
are the property of Contractor.
Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the
Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques,
connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to
determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a.
F.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product
represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show
approximate limits of the variations.
Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate
workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and
similar construction characteristics.
Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one full set of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
Number of Samples for Verification: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one
Sample sets; remainder will be returned.
a.
9.
Size limitations.
Compliance with recognized standards.
Availability.
Delivery time.
Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
a.
7.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name or name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead,
provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
BCB1011
Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
Number and name of room or space.
Location within room or space.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
Requirements."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
01330 - 5
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
H.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action.
I.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation."
J.
Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
K.
Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
L.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special
design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1.
2.
3.
Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity
responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an
officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
C.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm
or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
D.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements.
E.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure
Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
F.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
G.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where
required.
H.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 6
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
I.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.
J.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of
product, for compliance with performance requirements.
K.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before
installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed for adhesion.
L.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation
of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.
M.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer
complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
N.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for
Project. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name of evaluation organization.
Date of evaluation.
Time period when report is in effect.
Product and manufacturers' names.
Description of product.
Test procedures and results.
Limitations of use.
O.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures."
P.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and
design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions
and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if
applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page
numbers.
Q.
Manufacturer's Instructions:
Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product
or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer.
Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
R.
Preparation of substrates.
Required substrate tolerances.
Sequence of installation or erection.
Required installation tolerances.
Required adjustments.
Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service
representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 7
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
BCB1011
Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making
report.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements
and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
S.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance
or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage,
amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
T.
Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect,
Architect will not review this information but will return it with no action taken.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and
location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of
Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will
return them without action or discard them.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate
party.
D.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 8
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01351 - SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes special procedures for historic treatment on Project including, but not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Storage and protection of existing historic materials.
Temporary protection of historic materials during construction.
Protection during application of chemicals.
Protection during use of heat-generating equipment.
Historic treatment procedures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
"Preservation": To apply measures necessary to sustain the existing form, integrity, and
materials of a historic property. Work may include preliminary measures to protect and stabilize
the property.
B.
"Rehabilitation": To make possible a compatible use for a property through repair, alterations,
and additions while preserving those portions or features that convey its historical, cultural, or
architectural values.
C.
"Restoration": To accurately depict the form, features, and character of a property as it
appeared at a particular period of time by means of the removal of features from other periods
in its history and the reconstruction of missing features from the restoration period.
D.
"Reconstruction": To reproduce in the exact form and detail a building, structure, or artifact as it
appeared at a specific period in time.
E.
"Stabilize": To apply measures designed to reestablish a weather-resistant enclosure and the
structural reinforcement of an item or portion of the building while maintaining the essential form
as it exists at present.
F.
"Protect and Maintain": To remove deteriorating corrosion, reapply protective coatings, and
install protective measures such as temporary guards; to provide the least degree of
intervention.
G.
"Repair": To stabilize, consolidate, or conserve; to retain existing materials and features while
employing as little new material as possible. Repair includes patching, piecing-in, splicing,
consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading materials. Within restoration, repair also
includes limited replacement in kind, rehabilitation, and reconstruction, with compatible
SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT
01351 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
substitute materials for deteriorated or missing parts of features when there are surviving
prototypes.
H.
"Replace": To duplicate and replace entire features with new material in kind. Replacement
includes the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
Duplication: Includes replacing elements damaged beyond repair or missing. Original
material is indicated as the pattern for creating new duplicated elements.
Replacement with New Materials: Includes replacement with new material when original
material is not available as patterns for creating new duplicated elements.
Replacement with Substitute Materials: Includes replacement with compatible substitute
materials. Substitute materials are not allowed, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
"Remove": To detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
J.
"Remove and Salvage": To detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
K.
"Remove and Reinstall": To detach items from existing construction, repair and clean them for
reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.
L.
"Existing to Remain" or "Retain": Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
M.
"Material in Kind": Material that matches existing materials, as much as possible, in species,
cut, color, grain, and finish.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Historic Treatment Program: Submit a written plan for each phase or process including
protection of surrounding materials during operations. Describe in detail materials, methods,
and equipment to be used for each phase of work.
B.
Alternative Methods and Materials: If alternative methods and materials to those indicated are
proposed for any phase of work, provide a written description including evidence of successful
use on other, comparable projects, and program of testing to demonstrate effectiveness for use
on this Project.
C.
Qualification Data: For historic treatment specialists and supervisory personnel. Include list of
completed projects with the scope of work and budget for each.
D.
Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
historic treatment operations. Submit before work begins.
E.
Record Documents:
Include modifications to manufacturer's written instructions and
procedures, as documented in the historic treatment preconstruction conference and as the
Work progresses.
1.5
STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF HISTORIC MATERIALS
A.
Removed and Salvaged Historic Materials:
SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT
01351 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
BCB1011
Clean salvaged historic items.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Protect items from damage during storage.
Do not dispose of items removed from existing construction without prior written consent
of Owner.
B.
Existing Historic Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage
and soiling. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected
storage location and reinstalled in their original locations after operations are complete.
C.
Storage and Protection: When removed from their existing location, store historic materials
within a weathertight enclosure where they are protected from wetting by rain, snow, or ground
water, and temperature variations. Secure stored materials to protect from theft.
1.
Identify removed items with an inconspicuous mark indicating their exact original location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROTECTION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for precautions and effects of products and
procedures on adjacent building materials, components, and vegetation.
B.
Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when work begins and during its progress.
C.
Temporary Protection of Historic Materials during Construction:
1.
2.
3.2
Protect existing materials during installation of temporary protections and construction.
Do not deface or remove existing materials.
Attachments of temporary protection to existing construction shall be approved by
Architect prior to installation.
PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS
A.
Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site,
plants, and surrounding buildings from harm or damage resulting from applications of chemical
cleaners or paint removers.
B.
Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical cleaners selected for
Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use covering
materials that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant adhesives. Apply masking agents to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or
porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive
staining.
C.
Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes and dispose of off Owner's property.
SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT
01351 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.3
BCB1011
HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES
A.
The principal aim of preservation work is to halt the process of deterioration and stabilize the
item's condition, unless otherwise indicated. Repair is required where specifically indicated.
The following procedures shall be followed:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Retain as much existing historic material as possible; repair and consolidate rather than
replace.
Use additional material or structure to reinforce, strengthen, prop, tie, and support
existing material or structure.
Use only reversible processes.
Use traditional replacement materials and techniques. New work shall be distinguishable
to the trained eye, on close inspection, from old work.
Record the work before the procedure with preconstruction photos and during the work
with periodic construction photos.
B.
Prohibit smoking by personnel performing work in or near historic structures.
C.
Obtain Architect's review and written approval in the form of a Constructive Change Directive or
Supplemental Instruction before making changes or additions to construction or removing
historic materials.
D.
Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether due to
environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing; or due
to structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion.
1.
Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect.
E.
Where Work requires existing features to be removed, cleaned, and reused, perform these
operations without damage to the material itself, to adjacent materials, or to the substrate.
F.
Identify new or replacement materials and features with inconspicuous, permanent marks to
distinguish them from original materials. Record the legend of identification marks and the
locations of these marks on Record Drawings.
G.
When cleaning, match samples of existing materials that have been cleaned and identified for
acceptable cleaning levels. Avoid overcleaning to prevent damage to existing materials during
cleaning.
END OF SECTION 01351
SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT
01351 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in
the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also
cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect,
Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction
disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed
construction complies with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements.
Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C.
Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups
are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction,
coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples.
D.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01400 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.4
BCB1011
DELEGATED DESIGN
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
1.5
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on
the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for
each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a
design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with
performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
C.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
E.
Specification Section number and title.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01400 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
B.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
C.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F.
Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1.
Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations
governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and
similar conventions.
G.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing
and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests
and inspections to be performed.
H.
Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for compliance
with specified requirements for performance and test methods.
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and
construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately
demonstrate capability of product to comply with performance requirements.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the same
tasks for Project.
When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on Project.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01400 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
I.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,
and similar quality-assurance service to Architect [, through Construction Manager], with
copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.7
BCB1011
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services
specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
2.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner may engage a testing agency to conduct special tests
and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Testing agency will notify Architect, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Material
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Owner’s testing agency will, at the Contractor’s expense, retest failed work and reinspect
corrected work.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01400 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
D.
Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for
construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established
by the Contract Documents.
E.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
H.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of
date established for commencement of the Work.
1.
Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01400 - 5
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
A.
BCB1011
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
2.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of
these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01400 - 6
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
D.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.3
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards:
Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
REFERENCES
01420 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1.
D.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the
recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone
numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and
up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
ADAAG
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from Access Board
www.access-board.gov
FED-STD
Federal Standard
(See FS)
1.4
(800) 872-2253
(202) 272-0080
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale
Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade &
Professional Associations of the U.S."
B.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to
be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA
Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)
www.aluminum.org
(202) 862-5100
AAADM
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers
www.aaadm.com
(216) 241-7333
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
www.aabchq.com
(202) 737-0202
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
www.aamanet.org
(847) 303-5664
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
www.aashto.org
(202) 624-5800
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
www.abma-dc.org
(202) 367-1155
REFERENCES
01420 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
ACI
American Concrete Institute/ACI International
www.aci-int.org
(248) 848-3700
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
www.concrete-pipe.org
(972) 506-7216
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
www.aeic.org
(205) 257-2530
AF&PA
American Forest & Paper Association
www.afandpa.org
(800) 878-8878
(202) 463-2700
AGA
American Gas Association
www.aga.org
(202) 824-7000
AGC
Associated General Contractors of America (The)
www.agc.org
(703) 548-3118
AHA
American Hardboard Association
www.hardboard.org
(847) 934-8800
AI
Asphalt Institute
www.asphaltinstitute.org
(859) 288-4960
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)
www.aia.org
(800) 242-3837
(202) 626-7300
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
www.aisc.org
(800) 644-2400
(312) 670-2400
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
www.steel.org
(202) 452-7100
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
www.aitc-glulam.org
(303) 792-9559
ALCA
Associated Landscape Contractors of America
www.alca.org
(800) 395-2522
(703) 736-9666
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated
www.alsc.org
(301) 972-1700
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
www.amca.org
(847) 394-0150
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
www.ansi.org
(202) 293-8020
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association
www.apawood.org
(253) 565-6600
APA
Architectural Precast Association
www.archprecast.org
(239) 454-6989
API
American Petroleum Institute
www.api.org
(202) 682-8000
REFERENCES
01420 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
ARI
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
www.ari.org
(703) 524-8800
ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association
www.asphaltroofing.org
(202) 207-0917
ASCA
Architectural Spray Coaters Association
www.ascassoc.com
(856) 848-6120
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
www.asce.org
(800) 548-2723
(703) 295-6300
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers
www.ashrae.org
(800) 527-4723
ASME
ASME International
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
www.asme.org
(800) 843-2763
(212) 591-7722
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
www.asse-plumbing.org
(440) 835-3040
ASTM
ASTM International
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
(610) 832-9585
AWCI
AWCI International
(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International)
www.awci.org
(703) 534-8300
AWCMA
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(See WCSC)
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
www.awinet.org
(800) 449-8811
(703) 733-0600
AWPA
American Wood-Preservers' Association
www.awpa.com
(817) 326-6300
AWS
American Welding Society
www.aws.org
(800) 443-9353
(305) 443-9353
AWWA
American Water Works Association
www.awwa.org
(800) 926-7337
(303) 794-7711
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
www.buildershardware.com
(212) 297-2122
BIA
Brick Industry Association (The)
www.bia.org
(703) 620-0010
CCC
Carpet Cushion Council
www.carpetcushion.org
(203) 637-1312
(404) 636-8400
(573) 341-4471
REFERENCES
01420 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
CCFSS
Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures
www.umr.edu/~ccfss
CDA
Copper Development Association Inc.
www.copper.org
(800) 232-3282
(212) 251-7200
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.
www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com
(216) 241-7333
CGA
Compressed Gas Association
www.cganet.com
(703) 788-2700
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
www.cellulose.org
(888) 881-2462
(937) 222-2462
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
www.cisca.org
(630) 584-1919
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
www.cispi.org
(423) 892-0137
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
www.chainlinkinfo.org
(301) 596-2583
CPPA
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
www.cppa-info.org
(800) 510-2772
(202) 462-9607
CRI
Carpet & Rug Institute (The)
www.carpet-rug.com
(800) 882-8846
(706) 278-3176
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
www.crsi.org
(847) 517-1200
CSA
CSA International
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
www.csa-international.org
(800) 463-6727
(416) 747-4000
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute (The)
www.csinet.org
(800) 689-2900
(703) 684-0300
CSSB
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau
www.cedarbureau.org
(604) 820-7700
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
www.cti.org
(281) 583-4087
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
www.dhi.org
(703) 222-2010
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance
www.eia.org
(703) 907-7500
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
www.eima.com
(800) 294-3462
(770) 968-7945
REFERENCES
01420 - 5
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
EJCDC
Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee
www.asce.org
(800) 548-2723
(703) 295-6300
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
www.ejma.org
(914) 332-0040
ESD
ESD Association
(315) 339-6937
FCI
Fluid Controls Institute
www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org
(216) 241-7333
FGMA
Flat Glass Marketing Association
(See GANA)
FM
Factory Mutual System
(See FMG)
FMG
FM Global
(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)
www.fmglobal.com
(401) 275-3000
FSA
Fluid Sealing Association
www.fluidsealing.com
(610) 971-4850
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council
www.fscoax.org
52 951 5146905
GA
Gypsum Association
www.gypsum.org
(202) 289-5440
GANA
Glass Association of North America
(Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association)
www.glasswebsite.com
(785) 271-0208
GRI
Geosynthetic Research Institute
www.drexel.edu/gri
(215) 895-2343
GTA
Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of
North America
(See GANA)
HI
Hydraulic Institute
www.pumps.org
(888) 786-7744
(973) 267-9700
HI
Hydronics Institute
www.gamanet.org
(908) 464-8200
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(See NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
www.hpva.org
(703) 435-2900
HPW
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
www.hpwhite.com
(410) 838-6550
REFERENCES
01420 - 6
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
IAS
International Approval Services
(See CSA)
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
www.icea.net
(770) 830-0369
ICRI
International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
www.icri.org
(847) 827-0830
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
www.iec.ch
41 22 919 02 11
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
www.ieee.org
(212) 419-7900
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
www.iesna.org
(212) 248-5000
IGCC
Insulating Glass Certification Council
www.igcc.org
(315) 646-2234
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The)
www.igmaonline.org
(613) 233-1510
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
www.iliai.com
(812) 275-4426
ISSFA
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
www.issfa.net
(702) 567-8150
ITS
Intertek Testing Services
www.itsglobal.com
(800) 345-3851
(607) 753-6711
IWS
Insect Screening Weavers Association
(Now defunct)
LMA
Laminating Materials Association
www.lma.org
(201) 664-2700
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute
www.lightning.org
(800) 488-6864
(847) 577-7200
LSGA
Laminated Safety Glass Association
(See GANA)
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association
www.mbma.com
(216) 241-7333
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
www.maplefloor.org
(847) 480-9138
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association
www.metalframingmfg.org
(312) 644-6610
MH
Material Handling Industry of America
(See MHIA)
REFERENCES
01420 - 7
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
MHIA
Material Handling Industry of America
www.mhia.org
(800) 345-1815
(704) 676-1190
MIA
Marble Institute of America
www.marble-institute.com
(440) 250-9222
MPI
Master Painters Institute
www.paintinfo.com
(888) 674-8937
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and
Fittings Industry Inc.
www.mss-hq.com
(703) 281-6613
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
www.naamm.org
(312) 332-0405
NAAMM
North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers
(See GANA)
NACE
NACE International
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
www.nace.org
(281) 228-6200
NADCA
National Air Duct Cleaners Association
www.nadca.com
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The)
www.naima.org
(202) 737-2926
NAMI
National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc.
(304) 258-5100
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
www.nbgqa.com
(800) 557-2848
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
www.ncma.org
(703) 713-1900
NCPI
National Clay Pipe Institute
www.ncpi.org
(262) 248-9094
NCTA
National Cable & Telecommunications Association
www.ncta.com
(202) 775-3550
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
www.nebb.org
(301) 977-3698
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association
www.necanet.org
(301) 657-3110
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
www.nelma.org
(207) 829-6901
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
www.nema.org
(703) 841-3200
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
www.netaworld.org
(303) 697-8441
NAIMA
REFERENCES
(703) 684-0084
01420 - 8
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
NFPA
NFPA International
(National Fire Protection Association International)
www.nfpa.org
(800) 344-3555
(617) 770-3000
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
www.nfrc.org
(301) 589-1776
NGA
National Glass Association
www.glass.org
(703) 442-4890
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
www.natlhardwood.org
(800) 933-0318
(901) 377-1818
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
www.nlga.org
(604) 524-2393
NOFMA
National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
www.nofma.org
(901) 526-5016
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
www.nrca.net
(800) 323-9545
(847) 299-9070
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
www.nrmca.org
(888) 846-7622
(301) 587-1400
NSF
NSF International
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
www.nsf.org
(800) 673-6275
(734) 769-8010
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
www.nssga.org
(800) 342-1415
(703) 525-8788
NTMA
National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc.
www.ntma.com
(800) 323-9736
(703) 779-1022
NTRMA
National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association
(See RTI)
NWWDA
National Wood Window and Door Association
(See WDMA)
OPL
Omega Point Laboratories, Inc.
www.opl.com
(800) 966-5253
(210) 635-8100
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
www.pci.org
(312) 786-0300
PDCA
Painting and Decorating Contractors of America
www.pdca.com
(800) 332-7322
(703) 359-0826
PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute
www.pdionline.org
(800) 589-8956
(508) 230-3516
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute
www.pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu
(217) 333-3929
REFERENCES
01420 - 9
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections
www.boltcouncil.org
(800) 644-2400
(312) 670-2400
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
Contact by mail
only
www.rfci.com
RIS
Redwood Inspection Service
www.calredwood.org
(888) 225-7339
(415) 382-0662
RTI
Roof Tile Institute
(Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers
Association)
www.ntrma.org
(541) 689-0366
SAE
SAE International
www.sae.org
(724) 776-4841
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
www.sdi.org
(847) 462-1930
SDI
Steel Door Institute
www.steeldoor.org
(440) 899-0010
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
www.sefalabfurn.com
(516) 294-5424
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council
www.sgcc.org
(315) 646-2234
SIA
Security Industry Association
www.siaonline.org
(703) 683-2075
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
(See IGMA)
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
www.steeljoist.org
(843) 626-1995
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association
(561) 533-0991
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association
www.smacna.org
(703) 803-2980
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
www.smpte.org
(914) 761-1100
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics
Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
www.sprayfoam.org
(800) 523-6154
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
www.spib.org
(850) 434-2611
REFERENCES
01420 - 10
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
SPI/SPFD
Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The)
Spray Polyurethane Foam Division
(See SPFA)
SPRI
SPRI
(Single Ply Roofing Institute)
www.spri.org
(781) 647-7026
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America
www.ssina.com
(800) 982-0355
(202) 342-8630
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
www.sspc.org
(877) 281-7772
(412) 281-2331
STI
Steel Tank Institute
www.steeltank.com
(847) 438-8265
SWI
Steel Window Institute
www.steelwindows.com
(216) 241-7333
SWRI
Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute
www.swrionline.org
(816) 472-7974
TCA
Tile Council of America, Inc.
www.tileusa.com
(864) 646-8453
TIA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
Industries Alliance
www.tiaonline.org
(703) 907-7700
TMS
The Masonry Society
www.masonrysociety.org
(303) 939-9700
TPI
Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
www.tpinst.org
(608) 833-5900
TPI
Turfgrass Producers International
www.turfgrasssod.org
(800) 405-8873
(847) 705-9898
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
www.ul.com
(800) 704-4050
(847) 272-8800
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
www.uni-bell.org
(972) 243-3902
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.
www.usitt.org
(800) 938-7488
(315) 463-6463
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association
www.wastec.org
(800) 424-2869
(202) 244-4700
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
www.wclib.org
(800) 283-1486
(503) 639-0651
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(See WCSC)
REFERENCES
01420 - 11
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
WCSC
Window Covering Safety Council
(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers
Association)
www.windowcoverings.org
(800) 506-4636
(212) 661-4261
WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and
Door Association)
www.wdma.com
(800) 223-2301
(847) 299-5200
WIC
Woodwork Institute of California
www.wicnet.org
(916) 372-9943
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
www.wmmpa.com
(800) 550-7889
(530) 661-9591
WSRCA
Western States Roofing Contractors Association
www.wsrca.com
(800) 725-0333
(650) 548-0112
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
www.wwpa.org
(503) 224-3930
C.
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to
be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
BOCA
BOCA International, Inc.
(708) 7992300
www.bocai.org
CABO
Council of American Building Officials
(See ICC)
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical
(909) 5958449
Officials (The)
www.iapmo.org
ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials
www.icbo.org
ICBO
ES
ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc.
(800) 2844406
(562) 6990541
(800) 4236587
www.icbo.org/ICBO_ES/
ICC
International Code Council, Inc.
(703) 9314533
(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials)
www.intlcode.org
SBCCI
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
(205) 5911853
www.sbcci.org
REFERENCES
01420 - 12
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
D.
BCB1004
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and
are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE
Army Corps of Engineers
www.usace.army.mil
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission
www.cpsc.gov
(800) 638-2772
(301) 504-0990
DOC
Department of Commerce
www.doc.gov
(202) 482-2000
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
www.epa.gov
(202) 260-2090
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
www.faa.gov
(202) 366-4000
FDA
Food and Drug Administration
www.fda.gov
(888) 463-6332
GSA
General Services Administration
www.gsa.gov
(202) 708-5082
HUD
Department of Housing and Urban Development
www.hud.gov
(202) 708-1112
LBL
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
(See LBNL)
LBNL
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
www.lbl.gov
NCHRP
National Cooperative Highway Research Program
(See TRB)
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology
www.nist.gov
(301) 975-6478
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
www.osha.gov
(800) 321-6742
(202) 693-1999
PBS
Public Building Service
(See GSA)
RUS
Rural Utilities Service
(See USDA)
(202) 720-9540
SD
State Department
www.state.gov
(202) 647-4000
TRB
Transportation Research Board
www.nas.edu/trb
(202) 334-2934
REFERENCES
(510) 486-5605
01420 - 13
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1004
USDA
Department of Agriculture
www.usda.gov
(202) 720-2791
USPS
Postal Service
www.usps.com
(202) 268-2000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01420
REFERENCES
01420 - 14
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Salvaging nonhazardous waste.
Recycling nonhazardous waste.
Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial
demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of nonhazardous waste.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B.
Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
E.
Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in
another facility.
F.
Salvage and Reuse:
Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:
program.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Certified by EPA-approved certification
01524 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
BCB1011
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A.
Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until installation.
Protect items from damage during storage.
Salvaged Items for Sale: Not permitted on Project site.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A.
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, nonhazardous waste materials will be removed from Project by the Owner.
1.
B.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
END OF SECTION 01524
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01524 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of
products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard
warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.
Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken
from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment,"
"system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model
number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature,
that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process,
or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those
required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation,
to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,
physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable
products of other named manufacturers.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
D.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
E.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either
to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of
products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.
1.
2.
Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.
Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit two copies
of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations
from Contract requirements.
a.
4.
5.
B.
Specification Section number and title.
Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
Manufacturer's name and address.
Supplier's name and address.
Installer's name and address.
Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date.
At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and
designations that must be established early in Contract period.
Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit two copies
of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for
variations from Contract requirements.
Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of
completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product
selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of
response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract
Documents.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and
Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
Substitution Request Form: Use any industry accepted form.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as
applicable:
a.
b.
c.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors,
that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the
Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance,
weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
3.
1.5
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses
and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the
Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation
for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify
Contractor] of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of
request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
C.
BCB1011
Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products
for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
1.
2.
1.6
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible
with products and construction methods of other contractors.
If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding
of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
1.7
BCB1011
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling,
storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation,
and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage.
Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification,
ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly
executed.
Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document
using appropriate form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that
are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed
for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully
in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
6.
7.
B.
BCB1011
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal"
or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products"
Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
1.
Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single
product and manufacturer, provide the product named.
a.
2.
Manufacturer/Source:
Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the
manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.
a.
3.
6.
7.
8.
Substitutions may be considered.
Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available
Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the
products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions
in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available
Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the
manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with
provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed
product.
Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size,
profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or
system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or
system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product Substitutions" Article.
Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Basis-of-Design Product" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers'
names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and
other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in
"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
a.
9.
Substitutions may be considered.
Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed
that complies with requirements.
a.
5.
Substitutions may be considered.
Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a
list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that
complies with requirements.
a.
4.
Substitutions may be considered.
Substitutions may be considered.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 5
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches
satisfactorily.
a.
10.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from
manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and
manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.
a.
b.
11.
2.2
If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies
with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents
on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product.
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns,
textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in
Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for
processing such selections.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after
commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at
discretion of Architect.
B.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests
without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in value, cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must
assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for
redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar
considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated
results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been
coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with
other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other
required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 6
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
BCB1011
Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated
results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 7
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
1.4
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
General installation of products.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for
coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and
patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying that
location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
B.
Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
C.
Certified Surveys: Submit two paper copies signed by land surveyor or professional engineer.
In addition to paper copies, provide an electronic version in Autocad 2000 or later, format.
D.
Final Property Survey: Submit copies same as listed above showing the Work performed and
record survey data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
A.
BCB1011
Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1.
B.
Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
2.
C.
Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.2
Description of the Work.
List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
Recommended corrections.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and/or Owner that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's and Owner's written
permission.
C.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
D.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
E.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a
detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
E.
3.4
BCB1011
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name
and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1.
2.
C.
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
2.
3.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed.
Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
D.
Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
E.
Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real
property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that
principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the
survey.
1.
2.
3.5
Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing
improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,
and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
Recording: At Material Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
3.
4.
BCB1011
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 7’ – 8” in spaces without a finished ceiling.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Material Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1.
2.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
G.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
H.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6
OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction forces.
1.
2.
3.7
Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for
Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually
agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences
in actual construction progress.
Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the
Work depend on Owner's construction.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - 5
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
3.
BCB1011
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from
damage and deterioration at time of Material Completion.
G.
Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.
Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
1.
Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
H.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
I.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Material Completion.
J.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
K.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
operation.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Remove
01700 - 6
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.9
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Material Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.10
A.
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - 7
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building
for alterations.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting
and patching individual parts of the Work.
a.
1.3
Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer
to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other
Work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation
of other Work.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before
the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the
following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why
they cannot be avoided.
Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities
that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long
service will be disrupted.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01731 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
6.
7.
1.5
BCB1011
Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural
elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement
with original structure.
Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their
load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
C.
Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a
manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to
perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence
of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied
spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.
Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory
manner.
1.
E.
1.6
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
Membranes and flashings.
Equipment supports.
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work. If it is
impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced,
and specialized firm.
Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in
cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01731 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
BCB1011
Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be
performed.
1.
2.
3.2
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including
compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during
cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to
adjoining areas.
D.
Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,
bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas.
3.3
PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of
other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original
condition.
Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with
original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering
and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01731 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
BCB1011
Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
1.
2.
3.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and
refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface
of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings
and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a.
4.
5.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats
over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the
patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weather tight condition.
END OF SECTION 01731
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01731 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements.
Division 1 Section "Work Restrictions" for restrictions on use of the premises due to Owner
or tenant occupancy.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective
demolition operations.
Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
1.5
Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure.
Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated
to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be
removed from Project site.
SUBMITTALS
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
01732 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
A.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
B.
Proposed Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates
the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation.
Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.
C.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates
for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
Interruption of utility services.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services..
Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's
partial occupancy of completed Work.
D.
Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and
salvaged.
E.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed
to accept hazardous wastes.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar
in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct
selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours'
notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.
B.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1.
C.
Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
D.
Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without
written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
01732 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
under a separate contract.
E.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
F.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
G.
1.8
BCB1011
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
The Owner will have performed a portion of the demolition operations prior to the execution of a
contract for this scope of work. The Owner will maintain the existing facilities in their existing
condition until released for renovation.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during
selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1.
2.
B.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that
visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and
salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or
design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a
written report to Architect.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
01732 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
E.
Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element
might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures
during selective demolition operations.
F.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
3.2
UTILITY SERVICES
A.
Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective
demolition operations.
B.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by
Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing
utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
C.
Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to
be selectively demolished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
3.3
Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover.
Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with
selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective demolition and that
maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.
Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining
portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and
sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing
have been completed and verified in writing.
PREPARATION
A.
Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases,
explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition
operations.
B.
Pest Control: Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents and vermin
before and during selective demolition operations.
C.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used
facilities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around
closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways,
where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of
groups of trees to remain.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
01732 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
D.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to
people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and
from occupied portions of building.
Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing
construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to
structure and interior areas.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed
during selective demolition operations.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction,
in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated
temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing
requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
F.
Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and
dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
G.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent
movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled
movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1.
3.4
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
POLLUTION CONTROLS
A.
Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust
and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
1.
2.
B.
C.
Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable
conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure.
Vacuum carpeted areas.
Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and
areas.
1.
3.5
BCB1011
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey
debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations
began.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
01732 - 5
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
A.
BCB1011
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and
as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective
demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next
lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or
small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing
finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces,
such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting
flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting
operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly
dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and
to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose
excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before
selective demolition operations began.
B.
Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting, stairs,
walkways, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations.
C.
Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to
match new equipment.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and
equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item
functional for use indicated.
E.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage
location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition
operations are complete.
F.
Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with
construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of
areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective
demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
01732 - 6
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
G.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at
regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
H.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using
power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
I.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.
J.
Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in
RFCI-WP and its Addendum.
1.
Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods
recommended by RFCI.
K.
Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing. Refer to
applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements.
L.
Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.
3.6
PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A.
General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations.
B.
Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
C.
Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new
materials.
1.
Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved
masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
D.
Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction
in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
E.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another,
patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color,
texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if
necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
1.
2.
3.
F.
3.7
BCB1011
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with
installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch
and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats
until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of
installation.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of
uniform appearance.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
01732 - 7
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
A.
General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate
on-site.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 01732
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
01732 - 8
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Inspection procedures.
Project Record Documents.
Operation and maintenance manuals.
Warranties.
Instruction of Owner's personnel.
Final cleaning.
Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for
and Final Completion.
Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
products of those Sections.
MATERIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Material Completion,
complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the
list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner.
Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Material Completion. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect
will prepare the Certificate of Material Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items,
either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.4
BCB1011
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion,
complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect
will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction
that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
1.5
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
Submit certified copy of Architect's Material Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of
the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.6
BCB1011
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record
Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for
Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1.
Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown
originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity
is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from
original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers,
and similar identification where applicable.
Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract
modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from
that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily
identified and recorded later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are
marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot
be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate
the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product
Data.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
E.
1.7
BCB1011
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot
be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification
Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of
the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and
reference.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
1.
Operation Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Maintenance Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
1.8
Emergency instructions and procedures.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend
operations.
Description of controls and sequence of operations.
Piping diagrams.
Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
Maintenance procedures.
Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
Maintenance record forms.
Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
Copies of maintenance service agreements.
Copies of warranties and bonds.
Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify
each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,"
Project name, and subject matter of contents.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Material Completion is indicated.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated
portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period
by separate agreement with Contractor.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
1.
2.
3.
D.
BCB1011
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness
as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab
to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number
of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator
of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health
or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and
equipment not part of a system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for
each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.
For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.2
Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction,
and course content.
System design and operational philosophy.
Review of documentation.
Operations.
Adjustments.
Troubleshooting.
Maintenance.
Repair.
FINAL CLEANING
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 5
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with
local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance
program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Material Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project
site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free
of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering
of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo
if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that
already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1)
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
Do not paint over or remove "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar
equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting
from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces
of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with
requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 6
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
C.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials
into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 7
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
2.
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
3.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents
of the Work in those Sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
Number of Copies: Submit Two sets of marked-up Record Prints.
1)
Electronic Media: CD-R.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit two copies of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit two copies of each Product Data submittal.
1.
Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record
Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01781 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a.
b.
c.
2.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Dimensional changes to Drawings.
Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
Depths of foundations below floor.
Locations and depths of underground utilities.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
Revisions to electrical circuitry.
Actual equipment locations.
Duct size and routing.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order.
Changes made following Architect's written orders.
Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Record Originals: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Material Completion, review
marked-up Record Prints with Architect and Construction Manager.
1.
2.
C.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
3.
BCB1011
Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints.
Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1.
Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01781 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.2
BCB1011
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in
the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal
working hours.
END OF SECTION 01781
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01781 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
Emergency manuals.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes,
systems and equipment.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for
operation and maintenance manuals.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for products in those Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B.
Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting
inspection for Material Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.
Architect will return 1 copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are
acceptable.
B.
Final Submittal: Submit 2 copies of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final
inspection. Architect will return 1 copy with comments, If any, within 15 days after final
inspection.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01782 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
1.5
BCB1011
Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.
COORDINATION
A.
Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more
than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A.
Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
List of documents.
List of systems.
List of equipment.
Table of contents.
B.
List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C.
List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D.
Tables of Contents:
maintenance manual.
E.
Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with the same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE
Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
2.2
Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
MANUALS, GENERAL
A.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Title page.
Table of contents.
Manual contents.
Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Subject matter included in manual.
Name and address of Project.
Name and address of Owner.
Date of submittal.
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor and all subcontractors.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01782 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
6.
7.
C.
Name and address of Architect and all engineers.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1.
D.
If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
b.
2.3
BCB1011
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
EMERGENCY MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Type of emergency.
Emergency instructions.
Emergency procedures.
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01782 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
BCB1011
Fire.
Gas leak.
Water leak.
Power failure.
Water outage.
System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Chemical release or spill.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Operating procedures.
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01782 - 4
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
BCB1011
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls
as installed.
E.
Piped Systems:
identification.
2.5
Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
Material and chemical composition.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
2.6
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01782 - 5
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in the
manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For
each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and
maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in
Project Manual.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Maintenance Procedures:
maintenance procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
Include the following information and items that detail essential
Test and inspection instructions.
Troubleshooting guide.
Precautions against improper maintenance.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1.
2.
Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
Maintenance and Service Record:
Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that
provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01782 - 6
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
B.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
C.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1.
2.
E.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1.
F.
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment
or systems.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings
to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
G.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for the schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 01782
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01782 - 7
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 01820 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel, including the following:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for preinstruction conferences.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration
and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and
instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each
training module.
1.
At completion of training, submit one complete training manual for Owner's use.
B.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
C.
Attendance Record:
instruction time.
D.
Evaluations:
For each participant and for each training module, submit results and
documentation of performance-based test.
1.4
For each training module, submit list of participants and length of
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance
personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project,
and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning
performance.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01820 - 1
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
B.
Instructor Qualifications:
A factory-authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
C.
Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.
Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,
instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.
Review required content of instruction.
For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather
conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations.
minimize disrupting Owner's operations.
Adjust schedule as required to
B.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time,
and course content.
C.
Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for
each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections, and as follows:
1.
Equipment, including athletic equipment and food-service equipment.
2.
Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm and fire-extinguishing systems.
3.
Heat generation, including boilers, pumps and water distribution piping.
4.
Refrigeration systems, including chillers, pumps and distribution piping.
5.
HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems and terminal
equipment and devices.
6.
HVAC instrumentation and controls.
7.
Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards, panelboards and
motor controls.
8.
Lighting equipment and controls.
B.
Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include
a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following:
1.
Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01820 - 2
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Alignments.
Checking adjustments.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a.
b.
7.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
Control sequences.
Safety procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Operating procedures for emergencies.
Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
Adjustments: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
5.
Emergency manuals.
Operations manuals.
Maintenance manuals.
Identification systems.
Warranties and bonds.
Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Regulatory requirements.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
BCB1011
Diagnostic instructions.
Test and inspection procedures.
Maintenance: Include the following:
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01820 - 3
GA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
BCB1011
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Procedures for routine cleaning
Procedures for preventive maintenance.
Procedures for routine maintenance.
Instruction on use of special tools.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.
B.
Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2
INSTRUCTION
A.
Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to
coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of
participants, instruction times, and location.
B.
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1.
C.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1.
Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
D.
Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's
mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.
E.
Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial
training use.
END OF SECTION 01820
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01820 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following:
1.
Preparing subgrades for walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings.
2.
Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
3.
Base course for asphalt paving.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.4
Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
1.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or
below the ground surface.
Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or
layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner unless permitted
in writing by Owner and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according
to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Architect and Owner not less than five days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission.
3.
Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2.2
BCB1011
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a
combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL,
OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
1.
Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and
not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not
more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch
sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Detectable Warning Tape:
Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4
mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a
protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to
30 inches deep; colored as follows:
1.
Red: Electric.
2.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3.
Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4.
Blue: Water systems.
5.
Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide
protective insulating materials as necessary.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
EXPLOSIVES
1.
EARTHWORK
The use of Explosives is prohibited.
02300 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.3
BCB1011
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A.
3.4
Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of
surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
1.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
3.6
Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and
grades.
EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1.
Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe
or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Clearance: 12 inches on each side of pipe or conduit.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for
bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
1.
Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A.
B.
3.7
Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A.
3.8
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect.
1.
Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Architect.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A.
3.9
Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials
without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Coordinate with
Owner and Architect regarding location of stockpile. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
BACKFILL
A.
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1.
Construction below finish grade.
2.
Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3.
Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4.
Removing concrete formwork.
5.
Removing trash and debris.
6.
Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.11
A.
B.
C.
3.12
A.
3.13
A.
B.
BCB1011
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,
and bodies of conduits.
Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings; fill with
concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
Provide 4-inch thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below
surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a
minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a
height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
1.
Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement
of utility system.
Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is
removed.
Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
FILL
Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and
deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1.
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2.
Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3.
Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4.
Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5.
Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
MOISTURE CONTROL
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1.
Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or
ice.
2.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
C.
D.
3.14
A.
B.
3.15
A.
B.
3.16
A.
B.
C.
BCB1011
Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according
to ASTM D 1557:
Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according
to ASTM D 698:
1.
Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
2.
Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent.
3.
Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent.
GRADING
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated.
1.
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2.
Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3.
Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
1.
Place base course material over subbase.
2.
Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades,
lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit
weight according to ASTM D 1557.
3.
Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
4.
When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place
materials in a single layer.
5.
When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials
in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when
compacted.
Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent
lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials
and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing
agency to perform field quality-control testing.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following
locations and frequencies:
EARTHWORK
02300 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
1.
D.
3.17
A.
B.
C.
3.18
A.
Paved Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test
for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than
three tests.
2.
Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for
each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
PROTECTION
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1.
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape
and recompact.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
02300 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 02920 - LAWNS AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Seeding, hydroseeding, grass over areas; include furnishing labor, materials,
equipment, transportation, services, and guarantee necessary for spreading
topsoil.
2. Soil preparation, including fine raking and fertilization; seeding at locations
indicated.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 02320: Earthwork.
2. Section 02950: Exterior Plants.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Standards of the following as referenced:
1. American Sod Producers Association (ASPA).
B. Industry standards:
1. Georgia Seed Laws and Rules and Regulations.
2. Grassing Bulletins by the Cooperative Extension Service of Georgia College of
Agriculture:
a. Georgia Lawns, Establishment, and Maintenance.
b. Fertilization of Lawns.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Terms:
1. Satisfactory stand of grass: Full lawn cover over previously disturbed areas, with
living grass free of weeds and without bare spots.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Quality control submittals:
1. Grower's certificates for seed to indicate grass species, weed content and date.
2. Test reports and certificates of fertilizer analysis to indicate fertilizer type and
content.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and shipping:
1. Deliver seed with identification attached.
2. Protect seed against moisture and contamination during transportation and
delivery.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fertilizer:
1. Regular type: Nitrogen content derived from organic or inorganic sources;
LAWNS AND GRASSES
02920 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
bearing manufacturer's statement of analysis. Minimum requirements: 12%
nitrogen, 4% phosphoric acid, 8% potash.
2. Slow release type: 50% of nitrogen is in slow release form, content derived from
organic or inorganic sources; bearing manufacturer's statement of analysis.
Minimum requirements: 12% nitrogen, 4% phosphoric acid, 8% potash.
3. Commercial mixed type: Nitrogen content derived from organic or inorganic
sources, bearing manufacturer's statement of analysis. Minimum requirements:
10% nitrogen, 10% phosphoric acid, 10% potash.
B. Lime: Ground limestone containing not less than 85% carbonates; 50% passing 100
mesh sieve and 90% passing 20 mesh sieve.
C. Grass:
1. Bermuda (Cynodon dactylon) seed: Fresh, clean, hulled, new seed crop; 98%
minimum purity, 90% minimum germination, 1% maximum weed content.
2. Fescue (Festuca arundinacea) seed: Fresh, clean, hulled, new seed crop; 98%
minimum purity, 90% minimum germination, 1% maximum weed content.
D. Straw bales: Clean straw bales of hay, wheat, rye, oats, or barley.
E. Hydromulch:
1. Type: Wood cellulose fiber containing no germination inhibiting or growth
inhibiting agents.
2. Characteristics:
a. Percent moisture content: 9.0% (±3.0%).
b. Percent organic matter: 99.2% (±0.8%).
c. Percent ash content: 0.8% (±0.2%).
d. pH: 4.8 (±0.5%).
e. Water holding capacity: 1150 grams water per 100 grams fiber, minimum.
F. Mulch: Clean, seed free, straw of hay, wheat, rye, oats, or barley.
G. Asphalt emulsion: ASTM D977-77, Grade SS-1.
H. Water: Clean, potable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Rake areas to be grassed, fill depressions and remove stones over 2" in size, sticks,
and rubbish. Spread 30 lbs. lime and 16 lbs. fertilizer per 1000 SF. Thoroughly mix
soil, lime, and fertilizer to 4" depth.
B. After preparation of soil: Level areas to be seeded to finish grade, hand rake smooth,
allowing for settlement.
C. Verify and match type of existing grass, either Fescue or Bermuda. Notify Architect if
a different type is existing.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Seeding:
1. Uniformly distribute seed over designated areas using mechanical spreader, at
three lbs. per 1000 SF rate prepared soil.
2. Sow half of seed with spreader moving in one direction; remainder with spreader
moving at right angles to first sowing.
3. Cover seed lightly with minimum 1/4" of soil by hand raking.
4. Firm seeded area by rolling with light roller.
LAWNS AND GRASSES
02920 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
5. Mulch seeded areas having slopes of four to one or greater with straw mulch and
asphalt emulsion.
6. Letting seedlings dry out during germination is prohibited; keep moist until well
established.
B. Hydroseeding:
1. Apply seed/fertilizer/hydromulch mixture in water slurry. Dispense using hydraulic
mulching equipment in following minimum quantities:
a. Fertilizer: 1300 lbs. per acre.
b. Bermuda seed: 70 lbs. per acre.
c. Hydromulch: 1200 - 1500 lbs. per acre.
2. Seed only during period from May 1st to September 1st using Bermuda seed.
C. Maintenance:
1. Provide straw bale silt dams as temporary erosion control measures. Maintain
dams during construction period to prevent erosion. Remove straw bales at
completion of work, after areas have been stabilized by grassing.
2. Maintain seeded areas in moist condition after placing until established.
3. Water grassed areas and maintain at 1-1/2" to 2" height until Date of Material
Completion. Restrict first mowing of seeded areas until seed is established.
Remove grass clippings.
4. Maintain and fertilize grassed areas in accord with University of Georgia College
of Agriculture Bulletins #642, dated March 1971 and #710, dated April 1972.
5. Regrass areas larger than one square foot not having uniform stand of grass;
eradicate weeds appearing in grassed areas.
6. Remove excess soil and debris from Project site at completion of grassing
operation.
END OF SECTION 02920
LAWNS AND GRASSES
02920 - 3
GEORGIA DOL ROME CAREER CENTERRENOVATIONS
BCB1005
SECTION 02930 - EXTERIOR PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Related sections:
1. Section 02300: Earthwork.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Use plant materials true to name and size in accord with the following standards:
1. American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature, 1942 Edition of
Standardized Plant Names.
2. American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., 1996 Edition. American Standard for
Nursery Stock (grading of plant materials).
3. U.S. Dept. of Forestry Agricultural Handbook #541, Sept. 1979, checklist of U.S.
trees; native and naturalized.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Quality control submittals:
1. Certification: Plants are free from federal and state quarantine restrictions.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and shipping:
1. Identify and tag plants with correct botanical and common name for each species.
2. Do not deliver plants that can not be planted within one week after delivery.
3. Transport and deliver trees balled and burlapped and shrubs in containers.
4. Protect plants against dehydration, overheating, or contamination during
transportation and delivery.
5. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's original unopened packaging.
6. Packaged materials showing indication of exposure to moisture, other damage, or
contamination will be rejected at Project site.
7. Packaging shall identify manufacturer by name, brand name, and complete
analysis of contents.
8. Deliver bulk materials only with certification and analysis or test reports for each
load delivered.
9. Remove rejected materials from Project site immediately.
B. Storage and protection:
1. Maintain stored plants moist and covered with moistened burlap or heeled into
mulch to prevent dehydration or overheating.
2. Store fertilizer in a cool, dry, ventilated, and protected place.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory requirements:
1. State Agricultural Extension Service.
2. State Pesticide Control Board.
3. State Department of Natural Resources.
4. Federal or State Environmental Protection Agency.
B. Testing laboratory: Tests performed by acceptable testing laboratories.
1.06
WARRANTY
EXTERIOR PLANTS
02930-1
GEORGIA DOL ROME CAREER CENTERRENOVATIONS
BCB1005
A. Warrant plants to remain alive and healthy for a minimum of one year, beginning at
date of material completion.
B. Plants that have lost over thirty-three (33) percent of their branches are considered
dead and will be replaced.
C. All replacement stock shall be subject to the same warranty requirements as the
original stock. Any damage due to replacement operations shall be repaired at no
expense to the Owner.
D. The one-year warranty period on replacement plants shall begin on the day they are
installed.
1.07
SUPERVISION
A. All planting shall be performed by personnel familiar with the accepted procedure of
planting at Project locality and shall be under the constant supervision of a qualified
planting foreman fluent in speaking and understanding the English language.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Plant list: Complete list of plants, including schedule of quantities, sizes, and other
requirements are indicated on the plans.
B. Plant quality:
1. Typical of their species or variety.
2. Normal, well developed branches of uniform habit of growth with crown radially
symmetrical, and vigorous, fibrous root system. Bare root plants are not
acceptable.
3. Sound, healthy, and vigorous. Free from defects, disfiguring knots, abrasions of
the bark, sun scald injuries, plant diseases, harmful insects or insect eggs, borers,
any forms of infection, cuts of limbs over one-quarter (1/4) inch that have not
completely callused.
C. Measurements:
1. Size and grading standards: Conform to those of American Association of
Nurserymen unless otherwise stated.
2. Plant dimensions: Dimensioned as it stands in its natural position. Large plants
cut back to specified sizes will not be accepted. Measure trees six (6) inches
above natural grade for trees up to and including four-(4) inch caliper.
D. Guying materials and details: Indicated in detail on plan. Tree wrap is prohibited.
E. Soil amendments:
1. Mychorrhizal fungi and Biostimulants containing a minimum of one thousand
(1000) spores of VAM per three (3) ounces, and a minimum of eighteen (18)
million spores of Pisolithus tinctorius per three (3) ounces, in a Terra-Sorb
medium with yucca plant extract, soluble sea kelp extract, and humic acids.
2. Plant Health Care ‘Healthy Start’ 12-8-8 Biofertilizer tablets, twenty-one (21) gram
tablets, conforming to State fertilizer laws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Plants: Subject to inspection on nursery or collecting grounds before any plants are
dug. Installing plant material prior to plant material being inspected and approved by
Architect at Project site is prohibited. Architect shall be sole judge of quality and
EXTERIOR PLANTS
02930-2
GEORGIA DOL ROME CAREER CENTERRENOVATIONS
BCB1005
acceptability of materials. Immediately remove rejected material from site; replace
with acceptable material at no additional cost.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Balled and burlapped plants: Solid ball of earth held in place by burlap and rope or
metal basket. Broken, loose, or manufactured balls will be rejected.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Timing:
1. Begin planting when other site works, including topsoil placing to finish grade, has
progressed sufficiently to permit planting. Conduct planting operations under
favorable weather conditions normal for such work determined by accepted
practice in Project locality.
B. Layout:
1. Locate new planting as indicated except where obstructions overhead or below
ground are encountered or where changes have been made in construction.
2. Prior to excavating of planting areas or plant pits, or placing tree stakes, ascertain
utility lines location; observe precautions to be taken not to disturb or damage any
subsurface improvements.
3. Should obstructions be found, promptly notify Architect in writing who will arrange
to relocate plant material. Adjustments approved by Architect.
C. Setting plants:
1. Place plants upright and turned for most attractive side to be viewed. Remove
wires and surplus bindings from top and side of balls.
2. Complete removal of burlap from balls is prohibited; pull top third of burlap from
root ball.
D. Backfilling planting pits:
1. Fill pit with water; allow water to drain before backfilling. Contact Architect
immediately if water does not drain or drains slowly.
2. Backfill balled and burlapped stock to approximately three (3) to four (4) inches
from the top of root ball. Tamp backfill firmly to prevent settlement. Avoid
breaking or bruising roots. Remove or fold back burlap and tying material from
top three (3) to four (4) inches of root ball. Water and allow water to drain.
3. Thoroughly mix area around edge of root ball up to eight (8) inches wide to a
depth of eight (8) inches to incorporate the mycorrhizal fungal inoculant into
loosened soil. Equally space recommended amount of Biofertilizer tablets in
upper two (2) inches of soil, two (2) inches away from root ball. Add more backfill
and firmly tamp. Water to soil saturation.
E. Pruning:
1. Pruning or clipping plants prior to delivery except with permission of Architect is
prohibited.
2. Remove broken or badly bruised branches with clean cut. Do not paint over cuts.
Prune with sharp tools.
3. Do not trim or remove leaders from trees.
F. Guying and staking: Immediately after planting, guy and stake trees, as needed.
G. Watering: Water each plant immediately following planting, regardless of current
weather conditions.
3.04
MAINTENANCE
EXTERIOR PLANTS
02930-3
GEORGIA DOL ROME CAREER CENTERRENOVATIONS
BCB1005
A. Include watering, mulching, cultivating, fertilizing, spraying, repairing, and tightening
guy wires, resetting plants to an upright position or proper grade, removal and
replacement of dead material, and other operations required to keep plants alive in
healthy growing condition.
B. Perform maintenance work throughout warranty period.
C. Final inspection and replacements: Inspection of planting to determine its final
acceptance will be made at conclusion of warranty period. No plants will be accepted
unless they are alive and healthy. Replace dead plants, or plants that have lost their
natural shape due to dead branches, excessive pruning, or inadequate or improper
maintenance at no additional cost.
END OF SECTION 02930
EXTERIOR PLANTS
02930-4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Slabs-on-grade.
Sidewalks, Ramps and Curbs.
Equipment Pads.
Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blastfurnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.
D.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance
with requirements:
1.
E.
Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of
concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
F.
1.5
BCB1011
Cementitious materials.
Admixtures.
Fiber reinforcement.
Curing compounds.
Floor and slab treatments.
Bonding agents.
Joint-filler strips.
Repair materials.
Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1.
B.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1.
2.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.
Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade II.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures
through one source from a single manufacturer.
D.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
2.
E.
1.6
ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
Concrete Testing Service: The Architect will engage an independent testing service.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.2
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
B.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
D.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1.
E.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1.
2.
2.3
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed
concrete surface.
Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in
concrete surface.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706, deformed.
C.
Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184, fabricated from ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed bars,
assembled with clips.
D.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
E.
Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.
F.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
G.
2.4
BCB1011
Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends
square and free of burrs.
B.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports
from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice,"
of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
2.5
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S for concrete exposed to the exterior and
Class 1M for Interior concrete. Provide aggregates from a single source.
1.
2.
C.
2.6
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.
C.
Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or
mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing
chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494,
Type C.
D.
Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture:
Commercially formulated, non-setaccelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a
protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.7
BCB1011
FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.8
Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or[fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for
use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 in. long.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less
than 10 mils. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape.
B.
Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448,
Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
2.9
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
dissipating.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
RELATED MATERIALS
Bonding Agent:
butadiene.
ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
REPAIR MATERIALS
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by underlayment manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4,000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109.
Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.12
A.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by topping manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4,000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109.
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1.
B.
BCB1011
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
2.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
C.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of
cement.
D.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.13
A.
CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.
Slump Limit: 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch.
Air Content: 5-1/2 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch
nominal maximum aggregate size.
Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.
Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd.
Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal
maximum aggregate size.
Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
6.
2.14
A.
2.15
A.
BCB1011
Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended
rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94,
and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347-04 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces exposed to view.
Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces exposed to view.
Class D, 1 inch for rough formed surfaces not exposed to view
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
H.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
K.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
3.3
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F for 48 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by
form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.4
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643
and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.5
Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
B.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.
3.6
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1.
D.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.7
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless mix is
so designed and approved by Architect.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 9
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
C.
Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
1.
D.
2.
3.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that
have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time
necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
F.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
E.
BCB1011
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature
range required by ACI 301.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1.
2.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of
ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 10
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.8
BCB1011
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1.
C.
3.9
Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to view, to receive a rubbed finish or to be covered
with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.
Rubbed Finish:
indicated:
1.
D.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to view.
Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bullfloated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch
in 1 direction.
1.
C.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1.
D.
Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings or to receive mortar
setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.
Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied
or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 11
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
E.
Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish where indicated
and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
3.10
Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot-long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1.
G.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,
carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-filmfinish coating system.
Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly
trafficked floor surface.
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry
tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly
scarify surface with a fine broom.
1.
F.
BCB1011
Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. of dampened slip-resistive aggregate over surface in 1
or 2 applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface.
After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish.
After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to
expose slip-resistive aggregate.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after
work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green
and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as
shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
3.11
A.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 12
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
b.
2.
3.12
A.
Water.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
JOINT FILLING
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month.
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
Do not fill joints until
B.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C.
Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints.
Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.13
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling
and placing.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 13
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
D.
BCB1011
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make
edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brushcoat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before
bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in
place with bonding agent.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor
elevations.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without
coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E.
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F.
Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 14
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.14
BCB1011
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: The Architect will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to
perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.
B.
Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Verification of use of required design mixture.
Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50
cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
2.
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests
when concrete consistency appears to change.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; test for each
composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31.
3.
4.
5.
a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting
agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply
with the Contract Documents.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 15
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
END OF SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 16
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 04901 - CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes restoration and cleaning of brick as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Repairing clay masonry, including replacing damaged units.
Repointing mortar joints.
Removing plant growth.
Cleaning exposed clay masonry surfaces.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in restored clay masonry.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi ; 4 to 6 gpm.
B.
Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.
C.
High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for application
and use. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings: Full-size patterns for specially molded brick shapes and brick arches.
C.
Samples for Verification: Before erecting mockup, submit samples of the following:
1.
Each type of exposed masonry unit to be used for replacing existing units.
a.
2.
For each brick type, provide straps or panels containing at least four bricks.
Each type of sand used for pointing mortar.
a.
b.
For blended sands, provide samples of each component and blend.
Identify sources, both supplier and quarry, of each type of sand.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.
BCB1011
Each type of pointing mortar in the form of sample mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/2 inch
wide, set in plastic channels.
a.
Include with each sample a list of ingredients with proportions of each. Identify
sources, both supplier and quarry, of each type of sand and brand names of
cementitious materials and pigments if any.
D.
Qualification Data: For restoration specialists including field supervisors.
E.
Restoration Program: For each phase of restoration process, provide detailed description of
materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of
restoration work including protection of surrounding materials on building and Project site.
1.
2.
F.
Cleaning Program: Describe cleaning process in detail, including materials, methods, and
equipment to be used and protection of surrounding materials on building and Project site, and
control of runoff during operations.
1.
1.5
Include methods for keeping pointing mortar damp during curing period.
If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for any phase of
restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on
comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this
Project.
If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning work,
provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on comparable
projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Restoration Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced masonry restoration and cleaning
firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.
2.
3.
At Contractor's option, work may be divided between two specialist firms: one for
cleaning work and one for repair work.
Field Supervision: Restoration specialist firms shall maintain experienced full-time
supervisors on Project site during times that clay masonry restoration and cleaning are in
progress. Supervisors shall not be changed during Project except for causes beyond the
control of restoration specialist firm.
Restoration Worker Qualifications: Persons who are experienced and specialize in
restoration work of types they will be performing. When masonry units are being patched,
assign at least one worker among those performing patching work who is trained and
certified by manufacturer of patching compound to apply its products.
B.
Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners
that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained
representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection and assistance at
no additional cost.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for masonry restoration (face brick, cement,
sand, etc.) from one source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
D.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to test the
following. Provide test specimens and assemblies as indicated.
1.
E.
Replacement Brick: For each proposed type of replacement brick, according to sampling
and testing methods in ASTM C 67 for compressive strength, 24-hour cold-water
absorption, 5-hour boil absorption, saturation coefficient, and initial rate of absorption
(suction).
Mockups: Prepare mockups of restoration and cleaning as follows to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and qualities of materials and execution. Prepare mockups on existing walls under
same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
Repair an area approximately 36 inches high by 48 inches wide for each type of masonry
material indicated to be rebuilt or replaced.
Patch three small areas at least 1 inch in diameter for each type of masonry material
indicated to be patched.
Clean an area approximately 25 sq. ft. in area for each type of clay masonry and surface
condition.
a.
b.
4.
1.6
BCB1011
Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse
reactions unless cleaners and methods are known to have deleterious effect.
Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion of sample
cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.
Rake out joints in two separate areas approximately 36 inches high by 48 inches wide [as
for each type of repointing required and repoint one of the two areas.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver masonry units to Project site strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavyduty cartons.
B.
Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers,
labeled with manufacturer's name and type of products.
C.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
D.
Store hydrated lime in manufacturer's original and unopened containers.
containers have been damaged or have been opened for more than two days.
E.
Store lime putty covered with water in sealed containers.
F.
Store sand where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
1.7
Discard lime if
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Repoint mortar joints and repair masonry only when air temperature is between and 40 and
90 deg F and is predicted to remain so for at least 7 days after completion of work.
B.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for masonry repair and
mortar-joint pointing:
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
BCB1011
When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, masonry repair
materials, and existing masonry walls to produce temperatures between 40 and
120 deg F.
When mean daily air temperature is below 40 deg F, provide enclosure and heat to
maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 7 days after repair and
pointing.
C.
Hot-Weather Requirements:
Protect masonry repair and mortar-joint pointing when
temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and
repair materials. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.
Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above.
D.
Patch masonry only when air and surface temperatures are between and 55 and 100 deg F and
are predicted to remain above 55 deg F for at least 7 days after completion of work. On days
when air temperature is predicted to go above 90 deg F, schedule patching work to coincide
with time that surface being patched will be in shade or during cooler morning hours.
E.
Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and is predicted to
remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.
1.8
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Order replacement materials at earliest possible date, to avoid delaying completion of the Work.
B.
Order sand for repointing mortar immediately after approval of Samples or mockups. Take
delivery of and store at Project site a sufficient quantity of sand to complete Project.
C.
Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove plant growth.
Repair existing masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry
materials.
Rake out joints that are to be repointed.
Point mortar joints.
Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water
and other cleaning materials into the wall.
Remove paint.
Clean masonry surfaces.
Rake out joints that are to be repointed.
Point mortar joints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
2.2
BCB1011
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
MASONRY MATERIALS
A.
Face Brick and Accessories: Provide face brick and accessories, including specially molded,
ground, cut, or sawed shapes where required to complete masonry restoration work.
1.
Provide units with colors, surface texture, size, and shape to match existing brickwork
and with physical properties not less than those determined from preconstruction testing
of selected existing units.
a.
2.
3.
B.
Provide specially molded shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing
would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
Provide specially ground units, shaped to match patterns, for arches and where
indicated.
Building Brick: Provide building brick complying with ASTM C 62, of same vertical dimension as
face brick, for masonry work concealed from view.
1.
2.
2.3
For existing brickwork that exhibits a range of colors, provide brick that matches
that range rather than brick that matches an individual color within that range.
Grade SW where in contact with earth.
Grade SW, MW, or NW for concealed backup.
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
Factory-Prepared Lime Putty: Screened, fully-slaked lime putty, prepared from pulverized lime
complying with ASTM C 5.
B.
Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Color: Provide natural sand of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges.
Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend
several sands, if necessary, to achieve suitable match.
C.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for mortar mixes. Use only
pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.
D.
Water: Potable.
2.4
PAINT REMOVERS
A.
Alkaline Paste Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard alkaline paste formulation for removing
paint coatings from masonry.
1.
Available Products:
a.
American Building Restoration Products, Inc.; 800 Brush Grade.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
American Building Restoration Products, Inc.; No. 3 Grip 'N Strip.
Diedrich Technologies Inc.; 505 Special Coatings Stripper.
Dominion Restoration, Inc.; Dominion Multi-Layer Paint & Graffiti Remover.
Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Peel Away 2.
Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.; Hydroclean Solvent Paint Remover (HT-300).
Price Research, Ltd.; Price Strip-All.
ProSoCo; Sure Klean Fast Acting Paint Stripper.
Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, water-rinsable
solvent-type gel formulation, containing no methanol or methylene chloride, for removing paint
coatings from masonry.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
2.5
American Building Restoration Products, Inc.; Grip 'N Strip 800 F.A.
Diedrich Technologies Inc.; 404 Rip-Strip.
Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Peel Away 1 System.
ProSoCo; Enviro Strip #2.
Solvent-Type Paint Remover:
Manufacturer's standard water-rinsable, solvent-type gel
formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry.
1.
D.
Diedrich Technologies Inc.; 606/606X Extra Thick Multi-Layer Paint Remover.
Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.; Hydroclean Heavy Duty Paint Remover (HT716).
Price Research, Ltd.; Price Heavy Duty Paint Stripper.
ProSoCo; Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Paint Stripper.
Covered or Skin-Forming Alkaline Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard covered or skinforming alkaline formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry.
1.
C.
BCB1011
American Building Restoration Products, Inc.; 800 No Lye Grip 'N Strip, Super Bio
Strip Gel or Super Bio Strip Paste.
Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Peel Away 6.
ProSoCo; Enviro Klean NMC or Enviro Strip #3.
CLEANING MATERIALS
A.
Water for Cleaning: Potable.
B.
Hot Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F.
C.
Job-Mixed Detergent Solution:
Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium
polyphosphate (TSPP), 1/2 cup of laundry detergent, and 20 quarts of hot water for every 5 gal.
of solution required.
D.
Job-Mixed Mold, Mildew, and Algae Remover: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of
tetrasodium polyphosphate (TSPP), 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15
quarts of hot water for every 5 gal. of solution required.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
E.
Nonacidic Gel Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard gel formulation, with pH between 6 and 9, that
contains detergents and chelating agents and is specifically formulated for cleaning masonry
surfaces.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
F.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Diedrich Technologies Inc.; Envirorestore 100.
Dominion Restoration, Inc.; DR-60 Stone and Masonry Cleaner.
Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Safe n' Easy Heavy Duty Restoration Cleaner.
ProSoCo; Sure Klean Light-Duty Restoration Cleaner.
Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard acidic masonry restoration cleaner composed of
hydrofluoric acid blended with other acids, detergents, wetting agents, and inhibitors.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
I.
Dominion Restoration, Inc.; Bio-Cleanse.
Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Safe n' Easy Architectural Cleaner/Restorer.
Price Research, Ltd.; Price Non-Acid Masonry Cleaner.
ProSoCo; Enviro Klean Restoration Cleaner.
Mild Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly acidic cleaner containing no hydrochloric,
hydrofluoric, or sulfuric acid; or chlorine bleaches.
1.
H.
Price Research, Ltd.; Price Marble Cleaner-Gel.
ProSoCo; Sure Klean 942 Masonry Cleaner.
Nonacidic Liquid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly alkaline liquid cleaner formulated for
removing mold, mildew, and other organic soiling from ordinary building materials, including
polished stone, brick, aluminum, plastics, and wood.
1.
G.
BCB1011
American Building Restoration Products, Inc.; 801 Heavy Duty Masonry Cleaner.
Diedrich Technologies Inc.; 101 Masonry Restorer or 101G Granite, Terra Cotta,
and Brick Cleaner.
Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.; Hydroclean Brick, Granite, Sandstone and Terra
Cotta Cleaner (HT-626).
Price Research, Ltd.; Price Heavy Duty Restoration Cleaner or Price Restoration
Cleaner.
ProSoCo; Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Restoration Cleaner, Sure Klean 1028
Restoration Cleaner or Sure Klean Restoration Cleaner.
Two-Part Chemical Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of potassium or
sodium hydroxide based, alkaline prewash cleaner and acidic afterwash cleaner that does not
contain hydrofluoric acid.
1.
Available Products:
a.
ProSoCo; Sure Klean 766 Limestone & Masonry Prewash and Afterwash.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.6
BCB1011
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Masonry Patching Compound:
Factory-mixed cementitious product that is custom
manufactured for patching masonry, is vapor- and water permeable, exhibits low shrinkage, and
develops high bond strength to all types of masonry.
1.
2.
Formulate patching compound used for patching brick in colors and textures to match
brick being patched. Provide number of colors needed to enable matching each brick.
Available Products:
a.
b.
B.
Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Manufacturer's standard liquid, film-forming, strippable
masking material for protecting glass, metal, and polished stone surfaces from damaging effects
of acidic and alkaline masonry cleaners.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
American Building Restoration Products, Inc.; LM 130 Acid Shield.
Diedrich Technologies Inc.; Diedrich Acid Guard.
Price Research, Ltd.; Price Mask.
ProSoCo; Sure Klean Strippable Masking.
Masonry Repair Anchors, Spiral Type: Type 304 stainless-steel spiral rods designed to anchor
to backing and veneer. Anchors are flexible in plane of veneer but rigid perpendicular to it.
1.
2.
Provide driven-in anchors designed to be installed in drilled holes and relying on screw
effect rather than adhesive to secure them to backup and veneer.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
2.7
Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; Jahn Restoration Mortar.
Edison Coatings, Inc.; Custom System 45.
Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; Dur-O-Flex.
Heckmann Building Products, Inc.; #391 Spiro Remedial Tie.
Helifix Ltd.; [Helifix HRT60] [or] [Helifix HRT80].
MORTAR MIXES
A.
Preparing Lime Putty: Slake quicklime and prepare lime putty according to appendix to
ASTM C 5 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by
volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in
a clean, mechanical batch mixer.
1.
C.
Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and sand together before
adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp,
unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this
dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small portions until
mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of final mixing; do not
retemper or use partially hardened material.
Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do not alter
specified proportions without Architect's approval.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
D.
2.8
BCB1011
Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-tocement ratio of 1:10 by weight.
Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS
A.
Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions not exceeding concentration
recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
B.
Acidic Cleaner Solution for Brick: Dilute with water to produce hydrofluoric acid content of 3
percent or less, but not greater than that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
C.
Acidic Cleaner Solution for Terra Cotta: Dilute with water to concentration demonstrated by
testing that does not etch or otherwise damage terra cotta surface, but not greater than that
recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROTECTION
A.
Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site,
plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from masonry restoration work.
1.
B.
Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and
other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent chemical cleaning
solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and
other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and
vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of restoration and
cleaning work.
Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical cleaners used
unless chemical cleaners being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use materials
that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant adhesives. Apply masking agents to comply
with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or
porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent
adhesive staining.
Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff.
Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to
unprotected surfaces.
Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property.
Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents
soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water
penetration into building interiors.
Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces.
1.
2.
Cover sills, ledges, and projections to protect from mortar droppings.
Keep wall area wet below rebuilding and pointing work to discourage mortar from
adhering.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 9
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.
4.
D.
Immediately remove mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces.
Clean mortar splatters from scaffolding at end of each day.
Remove gutters and downspouts adjacent to masonry and store where indicated during
masonry restoration and cleaning. Reinstall when masonry restoration and cleaning is
complete.
1.
3.2
BCB1011
Provide temporary rain drainage during work as directed by architect or owner to direct
water away from building.
UNUSED ANCHOR REMOVAL
A.
Remove masonry anchors, brackets, wood nailers, and other extraneous items no longer in use
unless identified as historically significant or indicated to remain.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Remove items carefully to avoid spalling or cracking masonry.
If item cannot be removed without damaging surrounding masonry, cut off item flush with
surface and core drill surrounding masonry and item as close around item as practical.
Patch holes where items were removed unless directed to remove and replace units.
BRICK REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
A.
At locations indicated, remove bricks that are damaged, spalled, or deteriorated. Carefully
demolish or remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding masonry, in a
manner that permits replacement with full-size units.
1.
When removing single bricks, remove material from center of brick and work toward
outside edges.
B.
Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area. Maintain flashing,
reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition.
C.
Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and loose
masonry units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated
items.
D.
Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole bricks as possible.
1.
2.
3.
Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from brick by cleaning with hand chisels,
brushes, and water.
Store brick for reuse, as indicated.
Deliver cleaned brick not required for reuse to Owner.
E.
Clean bricks surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in
preparation for replacement.
F.
Install replacement brick into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is
required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
G.
Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet both replacement and surrounding
bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 g/30 sq. in. per
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 10
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
min. Use wetting methods that ensure that units are nearly saturated but surface is dry when
laid. Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing joints.
1.
2.
3.4
Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing
brickwork.
Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in
repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry, and at same
time as repointing of surrounding area.
MASONRY UNIT PATCHING
A.
Patch the following masonry units:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Units indicated to be patched.
Units with holes.
Units with chipped edges or corners.
Units with small areas of deep deterioration.
B.
Remove and replace existing patches, unless otherwise indicated or approved by Architect.
C.
Patching Units:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.5
Remove loose material from unit surface. Remove additional material so patch will not
have feathered edges and will be at least 1/4 inch thick, but not less than recommended
by patching compound manufacturer.
Mask or remove surrounding mortar joints if patch will extend to edge of brick.
Mix patching compound in individual batches to match each unit being patched.
Combine one or more colors of patching compound, as needed, to produce exact match.
Rinse surface to be patched and leave damp, but without standing water.
Brush-coat surfaces with slurry coat of patching compound according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
Place patching compound in layers as recommended by patching compound
manufacturer, but not less than 1/4 inch or more than 2 inches thick. Roughen surface of
each layer to provide a key for next layer.
Trowel, scrape, or carve surface of patch to match texture and surface plane of
surrounding brick. Shape and finish surface before or after curing, as determined by
testing, to best match existing brick.
Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until patching compound has set.
CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL
A.
Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width and
from one end of each elevation to the other.
B.
Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location.
1.
2.
Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to chemical cleaner being used.
Do not use plastic-bristle brushes if natural-fiber brushes will resist chemical cleaner
being used.
Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure
indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning
methods do not damage masonry.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 11
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
a.
3.
4.
5.
BCB1011
Equip units with pressure gages.
For chemical cleaner spray application, use low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable
for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with cone-shaped spray tip.
For water spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of
25 to 50 degrees.
For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature
between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated.
C.
Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all
surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without
streaking or damaging masonry surfaces.
D.
Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove plant, moss, and shrub growth from masonry
surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and allowing to
dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil and debris from open masonry
joints to whatever depth they occur.
E.
Preliminary Cleaning: Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that
are resistant to cleaning methods being used. Extraneous substances include paint, calking,
asphalt, and tar.
1.
2.
Carefully remove heavy accumulations of material from surface of masonry with a sharp
chisel. Do not scratch or chip masonry surface.
Remove paint and calking with alkaline paint remover.
a.
b.
3.
Comply with requirements for paint removal.
Repeat application up to two times if needed.
Remove asphalt and tar with solvent-type paint remover.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Apply only to asphalt and tar by brush without prewetting.
Allow paint remover to remain on surface for 10 to 30 minutes.
Rinse off with [cold] [hot] water using low-pressure spray.
Repeat application if needed.
F.
Water Spray Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches from
surface of masonry and apply water in horizontal back and forth sweeping motion, overlapping
previous strokes to produce uniform coverage.
G.
Chemical Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces to
comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application
methods, at Contractor's option. Do not spray apply at pressures exceeding 50 psi. Do not
allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended
by manufacturer.
H.
Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area
at each stage or scaffold setting. Periodically during each rinse, test pH of rinse water running
off of cleaned area to determine that chemical cleaner is completely removed.
1.
I.
Apply neutralizing agent and repeat rinse, if necessary, to produce tested pH of between
6.7 and 7.5.
After cleaning is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive
marks.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 12
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
J.
3.6
BCB1011
In an area directed by the architect, test each cleaning operation prior to general cleaning to
assure selected method will not harm the existing surfaces.
PAINT REMOVAL
A.
Paint Removal with Alkaline Paste Paint Remover:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Paint Removal with Covered or Skin-Forming Alkaline Paint Remover:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
2.
3.
3.7
Apply paint remover to dry, painted masonry with trowel, spatula, or as recommended by
manufacturer.
Apply cover, if required by manufacturer, per manufacturer's written instructions.
Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer or as
determined in test panels.
Scrape off paint and remover and collect for disposal.
Rinse with hot water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and paint
residue.
Use alkaline paste paint remover according to "Paint Removal with Alkaline Paste Paint
Remover" Paragraph, if necessary, to remove remaining paint.
Apply acidic cleaner to masonry, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure spray
equipment or soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended by
chemical cleaner manufacturer.
Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil.
Paint Removal with Solvent-Type Paint Remover:
1.
D.
Apply paint remover to dry, painted masonry with brushes.
Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer.
Rinse with hot water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and paint
residue.
Repeat process, if necessary, to remove all paint.
Apply acidic cleaner to masonry, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure spray
equipment or soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended by
chemical cleaner manufacturer.
Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil.
Apply thick coating of paint remover to painted masonry with natural-fiber cleaning brush,
deep-nap roller, or large paint brush.
Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer.
Agitate periodically with stiff-fiber brush.
Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and paint
residue.
In an area directed by the architect, test each paint removal method, under the observation of
the architect, to determine the most effective and least destructive method prior to beginning
general paint removal.
CLEANING BRICKWORK
A.
Cold-Water Wash: Use cold water applied by low-pressure spray.
B.
Cold Water Soak:
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 13
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
3.
4.
Wet masonry with cold hot water applied by low-pressure spray.
Scrub masonry with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly
dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from mortar
joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is
used and that masonry surface remains wet.
Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove detergent solution and
soil.
Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established
by mockup.
Mold, Mildew, and Algae Removal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Apply cold water by intermittent soaking.
Use perforated hoses or other means that will apply a fine water mist to entire surface
being cleaned.
Apply water in cycles with at least 30 minutes between cycles.
Continue water application until surface encrustation has softened sufficiently to permit its
removal by water wash, as indicated by cleaning tests.
Remove soil and softened surface encrustation from masonry with cold water applied by
low-pressure spray.
Detergent Cleaning:
1.
2.
D.
Wet masonry with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.
Apply mold, mildew, and algae remover by brush or low-pressure spray.
Scrub masonry with medium-soft brushes until mold, mildew, and algae are thoroughly
dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes for mortar joints and
crevices. Dip brush in mold, mildew, and algae remover often to ensure that adequate
fresh cleaner is used and that masonry surface remains wet.
Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove mold, mildew, and algae
remover and soil.
Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established
by mockup.
Nonacidic Gel Chemical Cleaning:
1.
2.
3.
Wet masonry with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.
Apply nonacidic gel cleaner in 1/8-inch thickness by brush, working into joints and
crevices. Apply quickly and do not brush out excessively so area will be uniformly
covered with fresh cleaner and dwell time will be uniform throughout area being cleaned.
Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below:
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
F.
BCB1011
As recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
As established by mockup.
Remove bulk of nonacidic gel cleaner by squeegeeing into containers for disposal.
Rinse with [cold] [hot] water applied by [low] [medium] [high]-pressure spray to remove
chemicals and soil.
Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established
by mockup. Do not repeat more than once. If additional cleaning is required, use steam
wash.
Nonacidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning:
1.
Wet masonry with [cold] [hot] water applied by low-pressure spray.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 14
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
Apply cleaner to masonry[ in two applications] by brush[ or low-pressure spray].
cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
G.
As recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
As established by mockup.
Two to three minutes.
Rinse with [cold] [hot] water applied by [low] [medium] [high]-pressure spray to remove
chemicals and soil.
Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established
by mockup. Do not repeat more than once. If additional cleaning is required, use steam
wash.
Wet masonry with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.
Apply cleaner to masonry in two applications by brush or low-pressure spray. Let cleaner
remain on surface for period indicated below:
a.
3.
4.
3.8
Let
Mild Acidic or Acidic Chemical Cleaning:
1.
2.
H.
BCB1011
As recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil.
Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established
by mockup. Do not repeat more than once. If additional cleaning is required, use steam
wash.
In an area directed by the architect, test each cleaning method, under the observation of the
architect, to determine the most effective and least destructive method prior to beginning
general masonry cleaning.
REPOINTING MASONRY
A.
Rake out and repoint mortar joints to the following extent:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
All joints in areas indicated.
Joints where mortar is missing or where they contain holes.
Cracked joints where cracks can be penetrated at least 1/4 inch by a knife blade 0.027
inch thick.
Cracked joints where cracks are 1/8 inch or more in width and of any depth.
Joints where they sound hollow when tapped by metal object.
Joints where they are worn back 1/4 inch or more from surface.
Joints where they are deteriorated to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand.
Joints, other than those indicated as sealant-filled joints, where they have been filled with
substances other than mortar.
B.
Do not rake out and repoint joints where not required.
C.
Rake out joints as follows:
1.
Remove mortar from joints to depth of joint width plus 1/8 inch or 2 times joint width for
joints 1/4 inch wide, but not less than 1/2 inch or not less than that required to expose
sound, unweathered mortar.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 15
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
3.
BCB1011
Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with
square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or
flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.
Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged masonry
units as directed by Architect.
a.
b.
Cut out mortar by hand with chisel and mallet. Do not use power-operated
grinders without Architect's written approval based on submission by Contractor of
a satisfactory quality-control program and demonstrated ability of operators to use
tools without damaging masonry. Quality-control program shall include provisions
for supervising performance and preventing damage due to worker fatigue.
Cut out center of mortar bed joints using angle grinders with diamond-impregnated
metal blades. Remove remaining mortar by hand with chisel and mallet. Strictly
adhere to written quality-control program. Quality-control program shall include
provisions for demonstrating ability of operators to use tools without damaging
masonry, supervising performance, and preventing damage due to worker fatigue.
D.
Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks,
loose masonry units, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.
E.
Point joints as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 hours including
weekends and holidays.
1.
2.
G.
Rinse masonry-joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time
rinsing application so, at time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of standing
water. If rinse water dries, dampen masonry-joint surfaces before pointing.
Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater
than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is
formed. Fully compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard
before applying next layer.
After low areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point all joints by
placing mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Fully compact each layer and allow to
become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing bricks have worn or
rounded edges, slightly recess finished mortar surface below face of masonry to avoid
widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar over edges onto exposed masonry
surfaces or to featheredge mortar.
When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints.
Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing.
Acceptable curing methods include covering with wet burlap and plastic sheeting,
periodic hand misting, and periodic mist spraying using system of pipes, mist heads, and
timers.
Adjust curing methods to ensure that pointing mortar is damp throughout its depth without
eroding surface mortar.
Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden at least
30 days before beginning cleaning work.
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 16
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.9
BCB1011
FINAL CLEANING
A.
After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar
and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, spray
applied at low pressure.
1.
2.
Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.
Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.
B.
Wash adjacent woodwork and other nonmasonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or
cloths.
C.
Clean masonry debris from roof; remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off roof
and flush gutters and downspouts.
D.
Sweep and rake adjacent pavement and grounds to remove masonry debris.
necessary, pressure wash surfaces to remove mortar, dust, dirt, and stains.
3.10
Where
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspectors: Owner may engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and
prepare test reports. Allow inspectors use of lift devices and scaffolding, as needed, to perform
inspections.
B.
Architect's Project Representatives: Architect will assign Project representatives to help carry
out Architect's responsibilities at the site, including observing progress and quality of portion of
the Work completed. Allow Architect's Project representatives use of scaffolding, as needed, to
observe progress and quality of portion of the Work completed.
C.
Notify inspectors and Architect's Project representatives in advance of times when lift devices
and scaffolding will be relocated. Do not relocate lift devices and scaffolding until inspectors
and Architect's Project representatives have had reasonable opportunity to make inspections
and observations of work areas at lift device or scaffold location.
END OF SECTION 04901
CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
04901 - 17
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
1.3
Steel pipe and tube handrails and railings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: In engineering handrails and railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine
allowable design working stresses of handrail and railing materials based on the following:
1.
2.
B.
Structural Steel: AISC S335, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress
Design and Plastic Design with Commentary."
Cold-Formed Structural Steel: AISI SG-673, Part I, "Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable of
withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stresses of
materials for handrails, railings, anchors, and connections:
1.
Top Rail of Guards: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Handrails Not Serving As Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as
indicated:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any direction.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Infill Area of Guards: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf
applied to 1 sq. ft. at any point in system, including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or
other elements composing infill area.
a.
C.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any direction.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with uniform load of 100
lbf/ft. applied vertically downward.
Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Load above need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails in
determining stress on guard.
Thermal Movements: Provide handrails and railings that allow for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05521 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
D.
1.4
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and
other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings. Include plans,
elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other Work.
1.
C.
Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected handrails and railings.
Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
For installed handrails and railings indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components
indicated below and of same thickness and metal indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal
color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1.
2.
6-inch- long sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top
rails, posts, and balusters.
Fittings and brackets.
D.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating products comply with
requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of
the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
handrails and railings that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability
to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of handrail and railing through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.6
STORAGE
A.
Store handrails and railings in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05521 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.7
BCB1011
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
1.8
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railings without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
1.9
Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts,
and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such
items to Project site in time for installation.
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls. Do not support
temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS
A.
General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other
imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
B.
Steel and Iron:
requirements:
1.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.2
Provide steel and iron in the form indicated, complying with the following
Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and
weight are required by structural loads.
Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing, ASTM A 500, Grade A, unless another grade is
required by structural loads.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Iron Castings: Malleable iron complying with ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M,
Grade 22010).
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS
A.
Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as
recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05521 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
compatibility in fabricated items.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type,
grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and railings to
other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
1.
C.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Handrail and Railing Components: Use fasteners fabricated from
same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are
corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
1.
2.
D.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting handrail and railing components and for
attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard
fastening method for handrails and railings indicated.
Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
For steel handrails, railings, and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
Cast-in-place anchors.
Chemical anchors.
Expansion anchors.
PAINT
A.
Shop Primers: Provide primers to comply with applicable requirements in Division 9 Section
"Painting."
B.
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to
provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
C.
Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc-coated
steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing
no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4
GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
B.
Interior Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled
expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring,
patching, and grouting compound. Use for interior applications only.
C.
Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement:
Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining,
hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05521 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to
erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that
is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that
required to support structural loads.
B.
Assemble handrails and railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value
of joined pieces.
C.
Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
By bending.
By mitering at elbow bends.
By inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.
By any method indicated above, applicable to change in direction involved.
D.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for
each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout
entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of
handrail and railing components.
E.
Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding. Cope
components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for
this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
Nonwelded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings by connecting members with concealed
mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to
produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive where this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
G.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and
anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to concrete or
masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails
and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
I.
For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel not less than 6 inches long with
inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, and steel plate
forming bottom closure.
J.
For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube whose ID is sized for a close
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05521 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than
one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged.
1.
Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing
sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.
K.
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges.
L.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form
bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing the Work.
M.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
N.
Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of handrail and
railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources.
O.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a watertight manner.
P.
Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
Q.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of
returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
R.
Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
S.
Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where
needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit
wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and
overstressing of substrate.
2.6
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
B.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
handrails and railings.
2.7
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Galvanized Handrails and Railings: Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron handrails and railings
to comply with ASTM A 123. Hot-dip galvanize hardware for exterior steel and iron handrails and
railings to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:
1.
2.
C.
ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05521 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
D.
For galvanized handrails and railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and
other ferrous components.
E.
For nongalvanized steel handrails and railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings,
brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete
or masonry.
F.
Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean handrails and railings of grease,
dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process.
G.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental
exposure conditions of installed handrails and railings:
1.
2.
H.
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrail and railing components, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for
shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1.
2.
Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
Stripe paint edges, corners, crevices, bolts, and welds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that
locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails and
railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels
and free from rack.
1.
2.
3.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical
or other means without further cutting or fitting.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps
and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
D.
Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05521 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
E.
3.3
BCB1011
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings.
Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish
of handrails and railings.
B.
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
C.
Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required
to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond
joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches of
post.
3.4
ANCHORING POSTS
A.
Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been
inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with the following anchoring
material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions:
B.
Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing
posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post
and concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring
material manufacturer's written instructions:
1.
Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement.
C.
Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave build-up, sloped
away from post.
D.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions,
connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1.
E.
3.5
For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.
ANCHORING RAILING ENDS
A.
Anchor railing ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and
anchored into wall construction with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
B.
Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.
1.
3.6
Connect flanges to railing ends using nonwelded connections.
ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
A.
Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05521 - 8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
face of handrail and finished wall surface.
B.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
C.
Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or
lag bolts.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.
Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing
between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material.
B.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.8
PROTECTION
A.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 05521
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05521 - 9
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Wood blocking and nailers.
Sheathing.
Plywood backing panels.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction.
C.
Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
B.
Source Limitations for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant-treated
wood product through one source from a single producer.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Wood Structural Panels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
Plywood: DOC PS 1
Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness
indicated.
Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction
Guide: Residential & Commercial."
Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood).
1.
Preservative Chemicals:
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the
Chromated copper arsenate (CCA).
Ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate (ACZA).
Ammoniacal, or amine, copper quat (ACQ).
Copper bis (dimethyldithiocarbamate) (CDDC).
Ammoniacal copper citrate (CC).
Copper azole, Type A (CBA-A).
Oxine copper (copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent.
B.
Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15
percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements
for untreated material.
C.
Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
D.
Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.3
BCB1011
DIMENSION LUMBER
A.
General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber
Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
B.
Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions:
following species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Eastern softwoods; NELMA.
Northern species; NLGA.
Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and
any of the following species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and any of the
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Eastern softwoods; NELMA.
Northern species; NLGA.
Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 15
percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Blocking.
Cants.
Nailers.
Furring.
Grounds.
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Eastern softwoods; NELMA.
Northern species; NLGA.
Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of
the following species and grades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 grade; NELMA, NLGA,
WCLIB, or WWPA.
Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.
Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
Western woods,[Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
D.
2.5
BCB1011
For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
SHEATHING
A.
Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
1.
2.
B.
Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
1.
2.
2.6
Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.
Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch.
Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.
Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
2.7
Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged,
fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153
or of Type 304 stainless steel.
B.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
F.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
G.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
H.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
Material:
Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
2.8
BCB1011
Material:
Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A.
General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and
size indicated, and as follows:
1.
2.
Research/Evaluation Reports:
Provide products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show
compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in
effect for Project.
Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values
shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency.
B.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60
coating designation.
C.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
1.
2.9
Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15
asphalt felt), unperforated.
B.
Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that
is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel
manufacturers.
C.
Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active
ingredient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B.
Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
C.
Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
D.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.
E.
Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as
required.
F.
Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill
holes with wood filler.
3.2
WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A.
Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of
masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.
3.3
WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
3.5
Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
B.
Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1.
Sheathing:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Nail to wood framing.
Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports.
END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. SUMMARY
1.
This Section includes the following:
b.
2.
Interior standing and running trim.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
a.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view.
b.Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for structural wood decking and framing exposed to
view.
c.
Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and back priming of finish carpentry.
C. SUBMITTALS
1.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
a.
Product Data for each type of factory-fabricated product and process specified, including
details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles,
textures, and colors.
b.
Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for
handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material:
1)
2)
3)
For each type of preservative-treated wood product include certification by treating
plant stating type of preservative solution and process used, net amount of
preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards.
For water-borne-treated products include statement that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site.
For fire-retardant-treated wood products include certification by treating plant that
treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements.
D. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed finish carpentry similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance.
E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.
Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air
circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
a.
BCB1011
Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation
areas.
F. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed
and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is
operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through the
remainder of construction period.
a.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's
recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be
applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS, GENERAL
1.
Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for lumber
and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards
Committee Board of Review.
a.
Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of
inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying
grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1)
b.
For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each
piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance
issued by inspection agency.
Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and
Industrial Plywood."
B. WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
1.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Comply with AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9
(plywood) and the following for items indicated to receive pressure preservative treatment. Mark
each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
a.
Preservative Chemicals: Pressure-impregnate woodwork with preservative chemicals
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed
through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish
treated material from untreated material.
1)
b.
2.
Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
Pressure-treat aboveground items with preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu.
ft. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent,
respectively.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
a.
General: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical
formulations indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction to produce products with fire-test-response characteristics specified.
1)
b.
BCB1011
Fire-Retardant Chemicals: Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or
otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish
treated material from untreated material.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber: Comply with the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Organic-Resin-Based Formulation: Exterior type per AWPA C20, consisting of
organic-resin solution, relatively insoluble in water, thermally set in wood by kiln
drying.
Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during
treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and
developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other
defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.
Kiln-dry material before and after treatment to levels required for untreated
material.
Discard treated material that does not comply with requirements of referenced
standards. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, discolored, or otherwise
damaged or defective material.
D. INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
1.
Softwood Trim: Provide finished lumber and moldings complying with the following requirements
including those of the grading agency listed with species:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Species: Western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Species: Douglas fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Grade: B & Btr. Select or Supreme
Lumber for Painted Finish: Glued-up lumber or solid lumber stock.
Hardwood Trim: Match species called out in drawings.
a,
Lumber for Transparent Finish: Solid Stock Lumber only.
E. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
1.
Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails of the following materials, in sufficient length
to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by
manufacturer.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Stainless steel.
Hot-dip galvanized steel.
Noncorroding aluminum.
Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size,
material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where
possible.
a.
Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and
anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.
BCB1011
Flashing: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for
flashing materials installed in finish carpentry.
F. FABRICATION
1.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and
manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry on relative humidity
conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
2.
Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
a.
Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in
finished work:
1)
2)
b.
Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches.
Interior standing and running trim, except shoe mold and crown mold.
Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. EXAMINATION
1.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. PREPARATION
1.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
2.
Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation, for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.
3.
Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with requirements
for surface preparation and application in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. INSTALLATION, GENERAL
1.
Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
2.
Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
3.
Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims
where required for alignment.
4.
Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by
manufacturer.
5.
Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable.
6.Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish carpentry with
1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.
7.
Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and running trim
and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of
trim and rails.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
8.Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of finish carpentry.
D. STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
1.
Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of
lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger
joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to
produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for
end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, if required.
a.Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
b.
Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
c.Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather.
E. ADJUSTING
1.
Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual
defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
F. CLEANING
1.
Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes
to restore damaged or soiled areas.
G. PROTECTION
1.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or
deterioration at the time of Material Completion.
END OF SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Interior standing and running trim.
Plastic-laminate cabinets.
Solid-surfacing-material countertops.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories.
B.
Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate,
solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and
processes.
C.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Show details full size.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets and other
items installed in architectural woodwork.
Apply WIC-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.
Samples for Initial Selection:
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
E.
Plastic laminates.
Solid-surfacing materials.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square.
3.
Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type.
F.
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates:
certificates.
G.
Qualification Data: For[Installer and fabricator.
1.5
BCB1011
AWI Quality Certification Program
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
C.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1.
D.
1.6
Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificates indicating that woodwork, including
installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions" Article.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
1.8
BCB1011
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1.
D.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Formica Corporation.
b.
Lamin-Art, Inc.
c.
Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
d.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.
e.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
Solid-Surfacing Material:
ISSFA-2.
1.
Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Avonite, Inc.
b.
E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
c.
Formica Corporation.
d.
Meganite Inc.; a division of the Pyrochem Group.
e.
Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
f.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
3.
2.2
BCB1011
Type: Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets.
B.
Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal, and as
follows:
1.
Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.
C.
Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
D.
Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141
E.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports:
B04112.
F.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091; side mounted and extending under bottom edge of
drawer; full-extension type; epoxy-coated-steel with steel ball-bearings; of the following grades:
1.
BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets,
Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100.
G.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
H.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
I.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch o. d. black, molded-plastic
grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
J.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
K.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or
lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
C.
Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D.
VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with
the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
E.
2.4
BCB1011
Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
B.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
indicated for the following:
1.
2.
C.
2.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will
be complete.
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting.
Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings
before disassembling for shipment.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
1.
2.5
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or
Less: 1/16 inch.
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1.
D.
Ease edges to radius
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine.
C.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
2.6
PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
C.
WIC Construction Style: Style A, Frameless.
D.
WIC Construction Type: Type II, single-length sections to fit access openings.
E.
WIC Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay.
F.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
Edges: Grade HGS
Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1.
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
a.
For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
2.
3.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
H.
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, Grade BKL.
I.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
a.
As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range.
J.
Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood above compartments and drawers, unless located
directly under tops.
2.7
SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 3/4 inch.
C.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solidsurfacing material complying with the following requirements:
1.
D.
As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material
manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
1.
2.
Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated.
Fabricate tops with shop-applied backsplashes.
E.
Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and other items in shop.
F.
each unit of work.
1.
.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B.
Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for
fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
E.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply
with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used
to install woodwork.
F.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails[ or finishing screws] for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
G.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1.
2.
H.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
I.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base if finished.
Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
BCB1011
Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from
a straight line.
Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
J.
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
K.
Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to
be shop finished.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402 - 8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Cavity wall insulation.
Concealed building insulation.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in cavity walls and masonry cells.
Division 9 Section indicated below for insulation installed as part of metal-framed wall and
partition assemblies:
a.
1.3
"Gypsum Board Assemblies."
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for each type of insulation product specified.
C.
Samples of exposed insulation for initial selection in the form of actual units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors available for each type of exposed insulation indicated.
D.
Samples for verification in full-size units of each type of exposed insulation indicated for each color
specified.
E.
Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency
evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal
resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, water absorption, and other
properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
F.
Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that evidence compliance of foam-plastic insulations with building code in effect for
Project.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from
a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without
delaying the Work.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
Provide insulation and related materials with the
fire-test-response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as
determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
BCB1011
Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and
other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions
for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B.
Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site
before installation time.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products by one of the
following:
1.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Amoco Foam Products Company.
DiversiFoam Products.
Dow Chemical Co.
UC Industries, Inc.; Owens-Corning Co.
AFM Corporation.
DiversiFoam Products.
Grace: W. R. Grace & Co. (Conn.); Construction Products Division.
Manufacturers with a third-party certification program satisfying model building code
mandatory requirements for foam plastics.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation:
a.
b.
Celotex Corporation (The).
NRG Barriers, Inc.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
4.
Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.
Schuller International, Inc.
Perlite Loose-Fill Insulation:
a.
2.2
BCB1011
Producer Members of Perlite Institute Inc.
INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.
1.
B.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed from
polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent
to comply with ASTM C 578 for type and with other requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Type I, 0.9-lb/cu. ft. minimum density.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of
75 and 450, respectively.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation with core
formed by using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent and faced on both sides with aluminum
foil to comply with referenced standards and with other requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Type IV, 1.60-lb/cu. ft. minimum density, unless otherwise indicated.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of
75 and 450, respectively.
Recycled Content: Not less than 50 percent blend of postconsumer and recovered
polystyrene resins.
Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed by
expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578 for
type and with other requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
D.
Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
Federal Standard: FS HH-I-1972/1, Class 1 (nonreinforced core).
ASTM Standard: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of
75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to
4 inches
Thermal Resistivity: 7.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F
Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation combining glass fibers with
thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA; or with ASTM C 553, Types I, II,
and III; and with other requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
Nominal Density: Not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft. nor more than 1.65 lb/cu.
Thermal Resistivity: 4.13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
F.
Foil-Faced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation combining glass fibers with
thermosetting resin binders and faced on one side with foil-scrim-kraft vapor retarder to comply with
ASTM C 612, Type IA; or with ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and III; and with other requirements
indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
G.
2.
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of
25 and 50, respectively.
Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type
described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A (blankets
with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing and flame spread of 25 or less); with foil-scrim-kraft,
foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.
1.
2.
L.
Nominal density of 2.25 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at
75 deg F.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of
25 and 50, respectively.
Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type
described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without
membrane facing).
1.
2.
K.
Nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of
25 and 50, respectively.
Glass-Mat-Faced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation combining glass fibers with
thermosetting resin binders and faced on one side with black glass-fiber mat to comply with
ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IA and IB; and with other requirements indicated below:
1.
J.
Nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of
25 and 50, respectively.
Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation combining glass fibers with
thermosetting resin binders and faced on one side with foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene
vapor retarder to comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IA and IB; and with other requirements
indicated below:
1.
2.
I.
Nominal Density: 1.5 lb/cu. ft.
Thermal Resistivity: 4.13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of
25 and 50, respectively.
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation combining glass fibers with
thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA and IB; and with other
requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
H.
BCB1011
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
Flanged Units: Provide blankets fabricated with facing incorporating 5-inch-wide flanges
along edges for attachment to framing members.
Perlite Loose-Fill Insulation: Expanded perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated
for water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water
repellency and limited dust generation during application), with a thermal resistance for 4.1- to
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
7.4-lb/cu. ft. insulation of 3.3 to 2.8 deg F x h x sq. ft/Btu at 75 deg F for thickness.
M.
Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: Glass fibers processed to comply with ASTM C 764 for type
(method of application) indicated below; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of
5 and 5, respectively, and as follows:
1.
2.3
Type 1 for pneumatic application.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13
perm.
B.
Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner
reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25
lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm.
C.
Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.4
AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely
to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
B.
Protection Board: Premolded, semirigid asphalt/fiber composition board, 1/4 inch thick, formed
under heat and pressure, standard sizes.
C.
Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit
between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and
vented eaves.
2.5
INSULATION FASTENERS
A.
Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle,
capable of holding insulation securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place, and
complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
B.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized steel
sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.
1.
C.
Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with each
leg 2 inches square.
Spindle: Copper-coated low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inches in diameter, length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Where spindles will be exposed to human contact after installation, protect ends with capped
self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap.
Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.1
BCB1011
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions
affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.
B.
Close off openings in cavities receiving poured-in-place insulation to prevent escape of insulation.
Provide bronze or stainless-steel screens (inside) where openings must be maintained for drainage
or ventilation.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and
snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D.
Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated.
E.
Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise
shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF CAVITY WALL AND MASONRY CELL INSULATION
A.
On units of plastic insulation, install small pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c.
both ways on inside face, as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall
ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly
against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.
B.
Pour granular insulation into cavities indicated to receive insulation, taking care to fill voids
completely. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour
area. Close ports after confirming complete coverage. Limit fall of insulation to 1 story in height,
but not exceeding 20 feet.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C.
Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
1.
Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
D.
Set reflective, foil-faced units with not less than 0.75-inch air space in front of foil as indicated.
E.
Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more
than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between
ends.
Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges
of insulation and adjoining framing members.
For wood-framed construction with faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange
over flange of adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material
is in place.
Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation
anchors as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according
to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.
After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over
spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to
compress insulation below indicated thickness.
Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips
of spindles.
G.
Place loose-fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or by machine
blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as
indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively.
H.
Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown.
Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of
approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..
3.6
INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.
Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to
cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B.
Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten
vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap
joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
C.
Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to vapor
retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor-retarder
tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
D.
Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as
recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.
E.
Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders
with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.
F.
Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.7
PROTECTION
A.
General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where
insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference
to this Section:
B.
This Section includes sealants for the following applications:
1.
Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
d.
Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls
and partitions.
Other joints as indicated.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Tile control and expansion joints.
Joints between different materials listed above.
Other joints as indicated.
Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
Joints between architectural precast concrete units.
Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems.
Joints between different materials listed above.
Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.
Other joints as indicated.
Division 4 Masonry Sections for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.
Division 9 Gypsum Board Assemblies Sections for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board
partitions to reduce sound transmission.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B.
1.4
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in
1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance
of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
E.
SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's
Sealant Validation Program.
F.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
G.
Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted
in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article.
H.
Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. Include information specified in
"Field Quality Control" Article.
I.
Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following:
1.
2.
Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
J.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with
requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.
K.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
C.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for
testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
JOINT SEALANTS
Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
07920 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific
joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants
to joint substrates.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during
installation.
Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims,
joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that
are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility
with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article
from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month
period.
1.
2.
3.
E.
BCB1011
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard
specifications and test methods.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1.
2.
Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a.
b.
3.
4.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
Install joint sealants in 60-inch-long joints using same materials and methods for joint
preparation and joint-sealant installation required for the completed Work. Allow
sealants to cure fully before testing.
Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts approximately
2 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 inch
from cross-cut end of 2-inch piece.
Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and mark; pull
firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while holding a ruler along
side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant
manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified
maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.
For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do
this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then
repeating this procedure for opposite side.
Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product
and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
6.
F.
obtained.
Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint
substrates during testing.
Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections
made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and
execution:
1.
1.6
BCB1011
Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive
elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
1.
2.
3.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
When joint substrates are wet.
B.
Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less
than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
C.
Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants
capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and
run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B.
Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
C.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Material Completion.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer
agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
D.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Material Completion.
Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
sealants from the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated
by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this
characteristic.
2.2
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and
uses.
B.
Elastomeric Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Silicone Sealant: One part silicone rubber, ASTM C290-86, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
Silicone Sanitary Sealant: One part silicone rubber, mildew and stain resistant, ASTM C92086, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
Polyurethane Sealant: Two part polyurethane base, ASTM C920-86, Type M, Grade NS, Class
25.
Butyl Sealant: One part butyl rubber, ASTM C1085-87.
Polysulfide Sealant: Two part polysulfide polymer, ASTM C920-86, Type M, Grade NS, Class
25.
C.
Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is required, provide
products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic
movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing
at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses
indicated.
D.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric
Joint-Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates
indicated for Project.
E.
Continuous-Immersion-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants will be
immersed continuously in water, provide products that have undergone testing according to
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
ASTM C 1247, including initial six-week immersion period and additional immersion periods
specified below, and have not failed in adhesion or cohesion when tested with substrates indicated
for Project.
F.
2.3
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come
in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A.
2.4
Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834-76 for flexible, non-staining acrylic latex
caulking.
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description, provide
manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834
and the following:
1.
2.5
Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies
according to ASTM E 90.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to
control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1.
Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.
C.
Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures
down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to
provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance.
D.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer
for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back
of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where
applicable.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests
and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming
joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum
adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
C.
BCB1011
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply
with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants,
oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable
of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from
above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint surfaces include the following:
a.
b.
3.
4.
Concrete.
Masonry.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
a.
b.
c.
Metal.
Glass.
Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer,
based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply
with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond;
do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use
of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions
indicated.
D.
Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
E.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and back of joints.
F.
Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings
are installed:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with
sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated.
Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and at
locations indicated.
a.
3.4
Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1.
Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:
a.
2.
Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric
sealant and joint substrate.
Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:
a.
JOINT SEALANTS
Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts approximately
2 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 inch
07920 - 8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
b.
c.
3.
4.
b.
c.
6.
B.
3.5
from cross-cut end of 2-inch piece.
Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and mark; pull
firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while holding a ruler along
side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant
manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified
maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.
For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do
this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then
repeating this procedure for opposite side.
Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with
specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log.
Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a.
5.
BCB1011
Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes
sealant manufacturer's field- adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids.
Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed,
names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were
primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and
sealant dimensions.
Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures
used to originally seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and new sealant
contacts original sealant.
Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or
noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants
that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest
failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products
in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and
from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Material Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so
installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 9
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
B.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Stile and rail wood doors.
2.
New doors are to match existing historic construction in design, wood species and details
of construction. Existing doors shall be used as the basis for construction. Drawings
indicate door detail intended to simulate assumed original exterior door designs.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and glazing.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and
moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data.
1.
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
C.
Samples for Verification: Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door
faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species solid lumber
required.
D.
Product Certificates: Signed by door manufacturers.
E.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
Obtain stile and rail wood doors through one source from a single
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08212 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
Quality Standard for Doors of Stock Design and Construction: Comply with WDMA I.S.6,
"Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," unless more stringent requirements are
specified.
1.
C.
1.5
Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with
WDMA I.S.6, and include panel design number if applicable.
Quality Standard for Doors of Special Design and Construction: Comply with [AWI's
"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards unless more stringent requirements are specified.
1.
D.
BCB1011
Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating
that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.
Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for
Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C.
Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed and wet
work is complete.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in
materials or workmanship, and have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by84-inch section.
1.
2.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Material
Completion:
a.
Exterior and Interior Doors: Five years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08212 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.2
BCB1011
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each stile and rail door is based on the existing
stile and rail doors.
MATERIALS
A.
2.3
General: Use only materials that comply with referenced quality standards unless more
stringent requirements are specified.
STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF SPECIAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
A.
Construction, General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.4
Grade of Doors for Opaque Finish: Premium.
Wood Species and Cut to match existing but not less than Clear Southern Yellow Pine.
Panel Designs: Drawings indicate panel designs. Do not modify intended aesthetic
effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications
are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
Joining of stiles and rails shall be single or double mortise and tenon, matching existing,
and pegged.
Exterior Doors:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: To Match Existing
2.
Stile and Rail Widths: As indicated.
3.
Molding Profile: As indicated and to match existing.
4.
Raised-Panel Thickness: As indicated and to match existing
5.
Glass for Openings: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
B.
Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water-repellent preservative to
comply with WDMA I.S.4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood stile
and rail doors will be installed.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08212 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
B.
3.2
BCB1011
Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
Reject doors with defects.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B.
Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced quality
standard, and as indicated.
C.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with firerated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
D.
1.
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is
shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.
2.
Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements:
1.
3.3
Division 9 Section "Painting."
ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08212
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08212 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of manually operated overhead coiling doors:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Service doors.
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying.
Division 9 Section "Painting" for field-applied paint finish.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to
the fully open position and returned to the closed position.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads.
B.
Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators
capable of operating for not less than 10,000 cycles.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the
following:
1.
Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
B.
Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data.
C.
Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1.
Curtain Slats: 12 inches long.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08331 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
D.
1.6
BCB1011
Qualification Data: For Installer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
1.
Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single
Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
Atlas Door; Div. of Clopay Building Products Company, Inc.
Cookson Company.
Mahon Door Corporation.
McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc.
Overhead Door Corp.
Raynor.
DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A.
Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to
withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended
by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:
1.
Aluminum Door Curtain Slats:
ASTM B 209 or ASTM B 221, alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
a.
b.
Aluminum Extrusion Thickness: Not less than 0.051 inch.
Flat profile slats.
B.
Endlocks for Service Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after fabrication, secured to
curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than
alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.
C.
Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8
inch thick aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats.
D.
Curtain Jamb Guides for Service Doors: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles or
channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to
operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Build up units with not less than 3/16-inch- thick
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08331 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
galvanized steel sections complying with ASTM A 36 and ASTM A 123. Slot bolt holes for
guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
2.3
HOODS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head.
Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges
for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and provide fascia for any portion
of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets
as required to prevent sagging.
1.
2.
Fabricate hoods for aluminum doors, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum
producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated; 0.032-inch minimum thickness,
complying with ASTM B 209.
Shape: Square.
B.
Integral Sills: Fabricate sills as integral part of frame assembly of same sheet metal; 0.078-inch
minimum thickness.
C.
Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated doors, provide galvanized steel lifting handles on
each side of door.
1.
Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84 inches high.
D.
Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by
padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
E.
Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.
2.4
COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A.
General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring
mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with
barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating
members.
B.
Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or
seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up
curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of
span under full load.
C.
Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs.
Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from
outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.
D.
Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring
ends and carry torsional load.
E.
Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or
cold-rolled steel plate.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08331 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.5
BCB1011
MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
A.
2.6
Push-up Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so required lift or pull for door
operation does not exceed 25 lbf.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
2.7
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B.
Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder-coat finish consisting of primer and
topcoat according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment,
application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness.
1.
2.8
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
STEEL AND GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES
A.
Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder-coat finish consisting of primer and
topcoat according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment,
application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness.
1.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.
ADJUSTING
A.
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08331 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.3
BCB1011
STARTUP SERVICES
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
2.
3.4
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 08331
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08331 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 08711 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for
swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same
sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.
B.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
1.3
Hinges.
Lock and latch sets.
Closers.
Protection plates.
Thresholds.
Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for silencers integral with hollow metal
frames.
Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for factory prefitting and factory premachining of
doors for door hardware.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification sections.
B.
Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware,
installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary
to show compliance with requirements.
C.
Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1.
Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into
"hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening. Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.Keying information.
DOOR HARDWARE
Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
Name and manufacturer of each item.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on
floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
Mounting locations for hardware.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
08711 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
2.
Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where
acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the
Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop
drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the
coordinated review of schedule.
3.Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final
instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
D.
Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description
for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule.
1.
E.
1.4
Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of
door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made
for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers,
etc.) from a single manufacturer. Field verify existing manufacturers and match existing.
B.
Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing
facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying
door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs
an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and
Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.
C.
Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA
Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door
hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other
testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and
sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.
1.5
1.6
Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged
through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation,
be incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and
include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B.
Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware
supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with
appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or
more identical sets may be packed in same container.
C.
Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until
each is satisfied that count is correct.
D.
Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project
site).
E.
Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control
handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion
of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
MAINTENANCE
DOOR HARDWARE
08711 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
A.
BCB1011
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance
instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Butts and Hinges: Match Existing
2.
Cylinders and Locksets: Match Existing
3.
Overhead Closers: Match Existing
4.
Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates: Match Existing
5.
Thresholds: Match Existing
HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS
A.
Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and
frames, provide only template-produced units.
B.
Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
For wood doors and frames install wood screws.
For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws.
Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1.
Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins.
2.Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins.
3.
Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.
4.Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.
D.
Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for
doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height.
1.
2.3
Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height
with same rule for additional hinges.
LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.
Key new cylinders and locks into existing master keying system.
B.
Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinders to match existing.
C.
Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
D.
Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide
individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related
locks.
DOOR HARDWARE
08711 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
E.
BCB1011
Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key
symbol, and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
F.
Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock.
1.Deliver keys to Owner.
2.4
LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS
A.
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved
lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL
requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.
1.
C.
2.5
Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, antifriction latchbolts as recommended by
manufacturer.
Provide extra long strike lips for locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into head frames, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides
nonrecessed strike for bolt.
Provide roller type strikes where recommended by manufacturer of the latch and lock units.
Provide 1/2-inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and preassembled types of locks and
3/4-inch minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1-inch minimum throw for all dead
bolts.
Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch-diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with
minimum 12-inch-long rod for doors up to 84 inches in height.
CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A.
Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's
recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and
anticipated frequency of use.
1.
Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than
recommended for use with standard arms.
2.Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated.
B.
Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be
accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1
provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing.
C.
Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers.
2.6
DOOR TRIM UNITS
A.
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of
either machine screws or self-tapping screws.
B.
Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height of
protection plates.
C.
Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not
more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE
08711 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.7
BCB1011
Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage).
THRESHOLDS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and
profile as shown or scheduled.
B.
Exterior Hinged or Pivoted Doors: Provide units not less than 4 inches wide, formed to
accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware
and to fit door frames, and as follows:
1.
For in-swinging doors provide units with interlocking lip and interior drain channel; include
hook on bottom edge of door and drain pan.
2.For out-swinging doors provide rabbeted type units with replaceable weatherstrip insert in
stop.
2.8
HARDWARE FINISHES
A.
Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or
push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).
B.
Provide finishes that match those existing.
C.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and
other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by
referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
D.
Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and
aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations
to indicate "no lacquer."
E.
The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed
in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S.
finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by
Architect.
1.
"Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by
the Door and Hardware Institute.
2.NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors."
B.
Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that
are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or
application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not
install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.
C.
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate
as necessary for proper installation and operation.
DOOR HARDWARE
08711 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
D.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners
and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E.
Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
F.
Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the
extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
3.2
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A.
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as
intended for the application made.
1.
Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of
a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy
and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean
operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
equipment.
B.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C.
Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and
hardware finishes.
D.
Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Material Completion, the
Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door
control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the
following work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors
and hardware to comply with specified requirements.
Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance
procedures.
Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or
installation of hardware units.
Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the
performance of the hardware.
END OF SECTION 08711
DOOR HARDWARE
08711 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 09210 - GYPSUM PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that support lath and
gypsum plaster.
Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for thermal insulations and vapor retarders
included in gypsum plaster assemblies.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for acoustical sealants included in gypsum plaster
assemblies.
Field Verification:
1.
1.3
Nonstructural steel framing and furring.
Gypsum plasterwork on expanded-metal lath and solid-plaster bases.
Restoration of existing plasterwork.
Before proceeding with plasterwork operations, verify existing conditions and existing
plaster materials for compatibility with the materials and procedures specified in this
section. Notify Architect immediately if plaster materials are of a different composition
than specified herein (Portland Cement Plaster Materials or Lime Plaster Materials.)
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum plaster assemblies with fire-resistance
ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
GYPSUM PLASTER
09210 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
B.
Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum plaster assemblies with STC ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
C.
Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Install mockups for the following applications:
a.
Troweled Finishes:
1)
2)
b.
c.
2.
3.
1.5
Surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes.
Surfaces indicated to receive textured paint finishes.
Surfaces with float finishes.
Surfaces with textured finishes.
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Material Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with ASTM C 842 requirements or
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Room Temperatures: Maintain temperatures at not less than 55 deg F or greater than 80 deg F
for at least 7 days before application of gypsum plaster, continuously during application, and for
7 days after plaster has set, or until plaster has dried.
C.
Avoid conditions that result in gypsum plaster drying out too quickly.
1.
2.
3.
gypsum
plaster
manufacturer's
written
Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster.
Maintain relative humidity levels for prevailing ambient temperature that produces normal
drying conditions.
Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces
during plaster application and until plaster is dry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
GYPSUM PLASTER
09210 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
2.2
BCB1011
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS, GENERAL
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Clark Steel Framing Systems.
2.
Consolidated Systems, Inc.
3.
Dale/Incor.
4.
Dietrich Industries, Inc.
5.
MarinoWare; Division of Ware Industries, Inc.
6.
Unimast, Inc.
7.
Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.
B.
Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 841. For steel sheet components not included in
ASTM C 841, comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Cold-Rolled Channels: Base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch.
1.
D.
2.3
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise
indicated.
Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch
diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS
A.
Suspended Furring:
1.
2.
Main Runners (Carrying Channels): Cold-rolled channels, 1-1/2 inches deep.
Cross Furring: Cold-rolled channels, 3/4 inch deep.
B.
Direct Furring: Cold-rolled channels, 3/4 inch deep.
C.
Tie Wire:
1.
2.
3.
For tying main runners directly to beams or joists (where wire hangers are used between
beams or joists), use double loop of 0.1205-inch-diameter wire.
For tying furring directly to steel or wood structure without main runners, use double loop
of 0.0625-inch diameter wire, or quadruple loop of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.
For saddle tying cross furring to main runners use 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double
strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.
D.
Wire Hangers: 0.162-inch- diameter wire.
E.
Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510, mild carbon steel, ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized.
1.
F.
Diameter: 3/16-inch.
Flat Hangers: Commercial-steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch.
GYPSUM PLASTER
09210 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.4
BCB1011
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise
indicated.
STEEL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS
A.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate:
indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise
indicated.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.
Vertical Furring:
1.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Protective Coating: A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise
indicated.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
Depth: 7/8 inch.
Furring Channels: Cold-rolled channels,3/4 inch.
a.
2.5
Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled channels, 1-1/2 inches deep.
1.
D.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise
indicated.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
Depth: As indicated.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type fabricated from steel sheet
with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch.
EXPANDED-METAL LATH
A.
Expanded-Metal Lath, General: ASTM C 847.
1.
2.
B.
Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring.
1.
C.
Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd.
Flat Rib Lath: Rib depth of not more than 1/8 inch.
1.
D.
Finish: ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
Paper Backing: Kraft paper factory bonded to back of lath.
Weight: 2.75 lb/sq. yd.
3/8-Inch Rib Lath:
GYPSUM PLASTER
09210 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.6
BCB1011
Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 841 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B.
Zinc and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Accessories:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
Cornerite: Fabricated from expanded-metal lath with ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
Striplath:
Fabricated from expanded-metal lath with ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
a.
5.
6.
2.7
Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO).
California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO).
Dale/Incor.
Dietrich Industries, Inc.
Phillips Manufacturing Co.
Unimast, Inc.
Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.
Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.
Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged
style; with expanded flanges.
Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type,
folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges
and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting
plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B.
Bonding Compound: ASTM C 631.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by
thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths
required to achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed
threads.
D.
Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 841.
E.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
F.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
GYPSUM PLASTER
09210 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne
sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
2.8
BASE-COAT PLASTER MATERIALS
A.
Base-Coat Plasters, General: ASTM C 28.
B.
Gypsum Ready-Mixed Plaster: With mill-mixed perlite aggregate.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
C.
Gypsum Neat Plaster: For use with job-mixed aggregates.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
D.
2.9
National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Gypsolite.
United States Gypsum Co.; Structo-Lite.
National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Two-Way Hardwall Plaster.
United States Gypsum Co.; Red Top Gypsum Plaster.
Aggregates for Base-Coat Plasters: ASTM C 35.
FINISH-COAT PLASTER MATERIALS
A.
Gypsum Gauging Plaster: ASTM C 28.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
B.
National Gypsum Company; Gauging Plaster (Super-White).
United States Gypsum Co.; Red Top Gauging Gypsum Plaster.
Gypsum Ready-Mixed Finish Plaster:
finish.
1.
Manufacturer's standard, mill-mixed, gauged, interior
Products:
a.
b.
National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Kal-Kote Smooth or Kal-Kote Texture as
required.
United States Gypsum Co.; Imperial Finish Plaster, Diamond Brand Interior Finish
Plaster or Red Top Finis as required
c.
C.
D.
Lime: ASTM C 206, hydrated finishing type.
1.
Type S: Autoclaved, double-hydrate lime.
2.
Type N: Normal, single-hydrate lime.
Aggregates for Float Finishes: ASTM C 35; graded per ASTM C 842.
GYPSUM PLASTER
09210 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.10
BCB1011
PLASTER MIXES
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's written instructions for applications
indicated.
B.
Base-Coat Mixes over Expanded-Metal Lath: Gypsum neat plaster with job-mixed sand for
scratch and brown coats of three-coat plasterwork.
C.
Base-Coat Mixes over Expanded-Metal Lath: For three-coat plasterwork, as follows:
1.
2.
Scratch Coat: Gypsum neat or with job-mixed sand.
Brown Coat: Gypsum neat plaster with job-mixed sand.
D.
Base-Coat Mix over Unit Masonry: Gypsum neat plaster with job-mixed sand for single base
coats of two-coat plasterwork.
E.
Finish-Coat Mix for Smooth-Troweled Finishes: 1 part gypsum gauging plaster to 2 parts lime
or Gypsum ready-mixed finish plaster.
F.
Finish-Coat Mix for Float Finishes: 1 part gypsum gauging plaster, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts
sand.
G.
Finish-Coat Mix for Sprayed Finishes: Gypsum ready-mixed finish plaster.
H.
Finish-Coat Mix for Textured Finishes: Gypsum ready-mixed finish plaster.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames
and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects
caused by plastering.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design
designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designations
from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
GYPSUM PLASTER
09210 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
BCB1011
Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant
at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.
Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge
trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing
partitions above acoustical ceilings.
C.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless
blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.
D.
Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting
construction with acoustical sealant.
3.4
INSTALLING NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
General: Comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 for applications indicated.
1.
B.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in plaster assemblies to
support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or
similar construction.
1.
C.
Comply with ASTM C 754 for installation of items not addressed in ASTM C 841.
Comply with details indicated on Drawings and with plaster manufacturer's written
recommendations.
Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural
movement.
1.
2.
Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure.
Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. At head
of assemblies, install slip-type joints that avoid axial loading and that support assembly
laterally.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Frame both sides of joints independently.
E.
Soffits: Unless otherwise detailed on Drawings, install furred or suspended soffits to comply
with requirements for ceiling installation; install framed soffits to comply with requirements for
partition installation.
3.5
INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS
A.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
2.
Install hangers plumb and free of contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
GYPSUM PLASTER
09210 - 8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.
4.
5.
BCB1011
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to limit deflection to 1/360 of span while supporting ceiling loads.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and tying, either directly to structure or directly to
fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, in a manner that will not cause
them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Rod and Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate and hanger, in a
manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Do not connect steel framing to or suspend it from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B.
Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for ceilings so members are level to
within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between
parallel members.
C.
Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
D.
Install steel framing components for ceilings in sizes and spacings indicated but not less than
that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
Hanger Spacing: 48 inches o.c.
Main Runner (Carrying Channel) Spacing: For suspended ceilings, 36 inches o.c.
Cross-Furring Spacing: For suspended ceilings, 12 inches o.c.
Furring Spacing: For furred ceilings, 12 inches o.c.
INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION FRAMING
A.
Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where plaster
assemblies abut other construction.
1.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-felt or foam-gasket
isolation strip between studs and wall.
B.
Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more
than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C.
Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue
framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions
above ceiling.
D.
Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction.
E.
Frame door openings with two studs installed at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
F.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof
structure above.
Support Spacing:
1.
2.
Install steel studs at 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Install vertical furring at 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM PLASTER
09210 - 9
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.7
BCB1011
INSTALLING METAL LATH
A.
General: Install according to ASTM C 841.
B.
Expanded-Metal Lath:
1.
2.
3.
3.8
Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring diamond-mesh lath.
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Install according to ASTM C 841.
B.
Cornerbeads: Install at external corners.
C.
Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plasterwork, except where plaster passes behind and is
concealed by other work and where metal screeds, bases, or frames act as casing beads.
D.
Control Joints: Install control joints with spacing between joints in either direction not exceeding
the following and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect:
1.
2.
3.9
Partitions: 30 feet.
Ceilings: 30 feet.
PLASTER APPLICATION
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 842.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished
plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface.
Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with
base-coat plaster material, before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is
indicated or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb
anchor.
Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that
act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not
terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets
and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.
B.
Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases.
C.
Finish Coats:
1.
Provide troweled finish, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Provide textured finish where required to match existing.
a.
D.
Textured Finish: Match existing adjacent surfaces.
Concealed Plaster:
GYPSUM PLASTER
09210 - 10
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
BCB1011
Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings,
and equipment, apply finish coat.
Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar
locations, finish coat may be omitted.
Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile and
similar finishes, finish coat may be omitted.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore
cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing
and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to
substrate has failed.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door
frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and
other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
END OF SECTION 09210
GYPSUM PLASTER
09210 - 11
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Interior gypsum wallboard.
Non-load-bearing steel framing.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry for wood framing and furring.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board
assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints
including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of
Work.
C.
Samples: For the following products:
1.
2.
1.5
Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and
on same backing indicated for Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
B.
1.6
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory."
Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
C.
BCB1011
STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance
Design Manual."
Gypsum Board Finish Mockups: Before finishing gypsum board assemblies, install mockups of
at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials
and execution.
1.
Install mockups for the following applications:
a.
Surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes.
b.
Surfaces indicated to receive textured paint finishes.
2.
3.
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Material Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations:
Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Steel Framing and Furring:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Clark Steel Framing Systems.
Consolidated Systems, Inc.
Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor.
Dietrich Industries, Inc.
MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind.
National Gypsum Company.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
g.
h.
2.
Scafco Corporation.
Unimast, Inc.
Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
BCB1011
American Gypsum Co.
G-P Gypsum Corp.
National Gypsum Company.
United States Gypsum Co.
STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A.
Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-diameter wire.
C.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows:
1.
Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a
qualified independent testing agency.
a.
2.
D.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosionresistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and
capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified
independent testing agency.
Hangers: As follows:
1.
2.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch
diameter.
Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510, mild carbon steel.
a.
b.
3.
4.
Diameter: 1/4-inch minimum.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized
Flat Hangers: Commercial-steel sheet, ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized
a.
Size: Minimum 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.
Angle Hangers: ASTM A 653, G60 , hot-dip galvanized commercial-steel sheet.
a.
b.
E.
Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch
Size: Minimum 7/8 by 1-3/8 inches
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538
inch, a minimum 1/2-inch-wide flange, with ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized coating.
1.
Depth: Minimum 1-1/2 inches.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
F.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
1.
2.
Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide
flange, 3/4 inch deep.
Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a.
b.
3.
4.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
Resilient Furring Channels:
transmission.
a.
1/2-inch-deep members designed to reduce sound
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped, with face attached to single flange by
a slotted leg (web) or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs.
Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
Depth: 3-5/8 inches.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.
a.
G.
BCB1011
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall.
Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring 640 System.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System.
STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A.
Components, General: As follows:
1.
2.
B.
Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with
ASTM A 653, G60 , hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
Depth: As indicated.
C.
Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges.
D.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate:
indicated.
1.
E.
Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide
flange.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
F.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
Depth: Minimum 7/8 inch.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1.
H.
Depth: Minimum 1-1/2 inches
Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
G.
BCB1011
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped, with face attached to single flange by a
slotted leg (web) or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide
flange.
1.
2.
3.
Depth: Minimum 3/4 inch.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare
steel thickness of 0.0312 inch.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-diameter wire.
I.
Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
J.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
2.4
INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.
1.
Regular Type:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Type X:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Thickness: 1/2 inch , unless otherwise indicated.
Long Edges: Tapered
Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered
Location: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. Vertical surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated.
Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance
than regular-type gypsum board.
1.
2.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.
D.
Location: Ceiling surfaces.
Proprietary Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to produce greater
resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum panels.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
BCB1011
National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Wallboard.
United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Brand Abuse-Resistant Gypsum
Panels.
Core: 1/2 inch , regular type or 5/8 inch, Type X, as indicated.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Location: As indicated.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.6
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at
exposed panel edges.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound; use
where indicated.
Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated or required my manufacturer’s
written information.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
C.
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a.
3.
4.
5.
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.7
BCB1011
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Available Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
B.
2.8
Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne
sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
1.
D.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
Asphalt-Saturated
nonperforated.
Organic
Felt:
ASTM D 226,
Type I
(No. 15
asphalt
felt),
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings
and that hangers will develop their full strength.
1.
3.3
Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standards:
installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board
assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories,
furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's
"Gypsum Construction Handbook."
C.
Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading
imposed by structural movement.
1.
2.
Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure.
Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install
slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally
support assembly.
a.
b.
D.
3.4
ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing
Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated.
Use proprietary firestop track where indicated.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Frame both sides of joints independently.
INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Secure rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to
inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
6.
7.
BCB1011
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B.
Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members
for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each
member and transversely between parallel members.
C.
Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
D.
For exterior soffits, install cross bracing and framing to resist wind uplift.
E.
Screw furring to wood framing.
F.
Wire-tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for
assemblies indicated.
G.
Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than
that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.
1.
2.
3.
H.
3.5
Hangers: 48 inches o.c.
Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.
Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system
meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A.
Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board
assemblies abut other construction.
1.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-felt isolation strip
between studs and wall.
B.
Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary
not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C.
Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue
framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions
above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
1.
2.
Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings,
install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and
decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
a.
D.
Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.
Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings:
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 9
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
BCB1011
Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel
can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F.
Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable
written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb
anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to
jamb studs.
1.
2.
3.
Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof
structure above.
G.
Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless
otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above
door heads.
H.
Z-Furring Members:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners
spaced 24 inches o.c.
At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10-inch staples fabricated
from 0.0625-inch-diameter, tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member.
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C.
Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
D.
Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
E.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
F.
Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 10
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
G.
Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
H.
Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor
joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or
provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
I.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
J.
Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural
members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to
fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inchwide joints to install sealant.
K.
Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead
edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting
structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
L.
Floating Construction:
Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by
manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction.
M.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints,
and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install
acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply
with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and
closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing
partitions above acoustical ceilings.
N.
Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
1.
3.7
Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.
PANEL APPLICATION METHODS
A.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels[vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a.
b.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of board.
At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 11
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
3.8
BCB1011
3.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4.
Z-Furring Members: Apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either
vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints
offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring
members.
Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to
ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
3.9
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for
tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels:
Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.10
A.
Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies
and sound-rated assemblies.
Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners,
and trim flanges where indicated.
Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape,
fasteners, and trim flanges where indicated.
Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless
otherwise indicated.
Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire
surface where indicated.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will
conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 12
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been
corrected.
1.
2.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project,
will be ready for above-ceiling observation.
Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board
ceilings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation.
Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems.
Installation of air-duct systems.
Installation of air devices.
Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing.
Installation of ceiling support framing.
END OF SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 13
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Ceramic tile.
Glazed wall tile.
Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.
Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for removing existing finishes.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plaster" for cementitious backer units.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for cementitious backer units.
Division 9 Section "Dimension Stone Tile."
DEFINITIONS
A.
Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint
width indicated.
B.
Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).
C.
Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the
following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1.
2.
1.5
Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile
surfaces.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of
accessories involving color selection.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
E.
Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
manufacturer and Installer.
F.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
G.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
H.
Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile from one source or producer.
1.
Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties for each contiguous area.
B.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each
aggregate from one source or producer.
C.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Stone thresholds.
Joint sealants.
Cementitious backer units.
Metal edge strips.
Build mockup of each floor tile installation.
Build mockup of each wall tile installation.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Material Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.7
BCB1011
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile
packages.
B.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from
freezing.
E.
Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding
surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to minimum 3 percent of
amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1.
2.
3.
CERAMIC TILE
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product named.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
09310 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.2
BCB1011
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1.
2.
Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in
Part 1 "Definitions" Article.
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI
standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.
C.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile,
grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other
appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following
requirements:
1.
As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
E.
Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back-mounted tile assemblies as standard with
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
F.
2.3
Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back-mounted tile
assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is
suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.
Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous
film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
TILE PRODUCTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
American Marazzi Tile, Inc.
American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp.
Buchtal Corporation USA.
Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc.
Florida Tile Industries, Inc.
Lone Star Ceramics Company.
Metropolitan Ceramics.
Monarch Tile, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
Unglazed Ceramic Tile:
1.
2.
3.
4.
CERAMIC TILE
Composition: Porcelain
Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture.
Module Size: 8 by 8 inches.
Nominal Thickness 5/16 inch.
09310 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
5.
6.
C.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved, module size 6 by 6 inches
Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight, module size 6 by 6 inches
Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose cap, module size 6 by
2 inches
Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 6 by 2
inches
Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is
shown flush with wall surface above.
External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape with radius of
at least 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners except with coved base and cap angle
pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.
Ceramic Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes
and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from
manufacturer's standard shapes:
1.
2.4
Module Size: 6 by 6 inches
Thickness: 5/16 inch.
Face: Plain with cushion edges.
Finish: Semi-gloss or matte glaze.
Basis-of-Design Product: Daltile: Walltile, semi-gloss/matte
Glazed Wall Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with
sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected
from manufacturer's standard shapes:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Face: Plain with modified cushion edges.
Basis-of-Design Product: Daltile: Porcealto, Grani Series
Glazed Wall Tile: Flat tile as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
BCB1011
Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile
floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide reduction in
thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch across nominal 4-inch dimension.
THRESHOLDS
A.
General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
1.
B.
Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit
height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.
Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353
or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.
1.
CERAMIC TILE
Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.
09310 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.5
BCB1011
SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.
Bonsal, W. R., Company.
LATICRETE International Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:
1.
2.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive
to which only water must be added at Project site.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber
liquid-latex additive.
a.
For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
C.
Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3[, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)].
D.
Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or
colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
E.
Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.
F.
Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.
2.6
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base
polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants."
1.
Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with
fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that
are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
2.7
CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS
A.
Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9 in maximum lengths available to
minimize end-to-end butt joints.
1.
2.
CERAMIC TILE
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Width: 48 inches
09310 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.8
BCB1011
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications,
stainless steel; ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.
C.
Temporary Protective Coating: Product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed
surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout
products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1.
Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is
specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
D.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
E.
Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not
change color or appearance of grout.
2.9
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1.
2.
3.
CERAMIC TILE
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of
tile installation standards for installations indicated.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
09310 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
3.2
BCB1011
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax,
oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B.
Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar that comply
with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.
1.
2.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound
according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product
specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals,
verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package
show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
D.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous
film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods
indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B.
TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA
installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform
joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G.
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar
beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
H.
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1.
3.4
BCB1011
For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and
latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including
those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.
1.
For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
a.
B.
Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1.
C.
Exterior tile floors.
Ceramic Tile: 3/16 inch.
Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting
bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would
otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
D.
Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
E.
Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints,
remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.5
WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile
Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI settingbed standards.
B.
Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1.
C.
Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1.
CERAMIC TILE
Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.
09310 - 9
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.6
BCB1011
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1.
2.
3.
Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation.
Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
B.
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed
tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
C.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
D.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 10
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 09385 - DIMENSION STONE TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Dimension stone tile and related setting materials applied to floors.
Metal edge strips installed as part of dimension stone tile installation.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in stone tile with elastomeric
sealants.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Dimension Stone Tile: Modular stone units less than 7/16 inch thick.
B.
Module Size: Actual tile size.
C.
Polished Finish: Smooth finish that produces sharp, mirrorlike reflections. Reflected images of
overhead fluorescent tubes have straight lines without visible distortion when viewed at arm's
length.
D.
Honed Finish: Smooth, nonreflective finish similar to that produced by grinding with a 400- to
1200-grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 0.005 inch, when faces are tested for flatness with
a 24-inch straightedge.
E.
Sand-Rubbed Finish: Uniform, fine-textured surface similar to that produced by grinding with a
40-grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 1/32 inch, when faces are tested for flatness with a
24-inch straightedge.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of stone tile and tile pattern. Show widths,
details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in substrates and
finished stone tile surfaces.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of grout indicated and accessories involving color
selection.
DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
D.
BCB1011
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
Full-size units of each type of stone tile.
Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
E.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
F.
Maintenance Data: For dimension stone tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Supplier Qualifications: A firm experienced in supplying products similar to those indicated for
the Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations for Stone Tile and Thresholds: Obtain each type of stone product through
one source from a single producer.
1.
Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of product, size, and finish, from same location
in a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties.
C.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials:
product through one source from a single manufacturer.
D.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section through one source from a single manufacturer:
1.
2.
E.
1.6
Joint sealants.
Metal edge strips.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
F.
Obtain each type of manufactured
Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Material Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in factory wrappings, clearly labeled with identification of
manufacturer and lot number.
B.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from
freezing.
DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.7
BCB1011
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Environmental Limitations: Do not install stone tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Sequence stone tile installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling
during remainder of construction period.
B.
Install stone tile and accessories only after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Dimension Stone Tile: Furnish 5 full sized stone tile units in each color indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STONE PRODUCTS
A.
Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements for each stone product type,
provide one of the stone varieties indicated.
1.
2.
Where two or more stone product types listed in the paragraphs below are identical
except for size or finish, provide same variety from same source for each type.
Where threshold types are identical to tile types except for size or finish, provide same
variety from same source for each type.
B.
Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone varieties from
sources indicated.
C.
Abrasion Resistance: Provide stone with a value of not less than 10, as determined per
ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241.
D.
Provide stone products that are free of defects impairing their function for use indicated,
including cracks, seams, and starts.
E.
Stone Tile Type:
1.
2.
Stone Type:Marble,
Varieties and Sources:
a.
AKDO Negro Marquina MB 12” x 12”
b.
AKDO Afron White MB 12” x 12”
DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.2
BCB1011
Cut: Vein cut.
Finish: Honed.
Edges: Square.
Module Size: 12 by 12 inches.
Nominal Tile Thickness: 3/8 inch.
Joint Width: Hand tight.
Refer to drawings for pattern and finished sizes of stone tile installation.
SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:
1.
C.
2.3
Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.
Bonsal, W. R., Company.
Laticrete International, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
TEC Incorporated; H. B. Fuller Company.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic-resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber
liquid-latex additive.
Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and
characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
1.
Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant.
B.
Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness; metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications,
and stainless steel; ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material with satin finish.
DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
C.
Protective Coating: Liquid grout-release coating that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces
of stone tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with stone, mortar, and grout
products; easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or stone tile; and
recommended for use as temporary protective coating for stone tile.
D.
Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming stone tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by stone tile
producers and grout manufacturers.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Facial Dimensions of Stone Tiles with Honed Faces: Do not vary facial dimensions from
specified dimensions by more than plus or minus 1/64 inch.
B.
Thickness of Stone Tiles with Honed Finish: Do not vary from specified thickness by more than
plus or minus 1/32 inch.
C.
Joint Surfaces: Except for specified beveled or eased edges, if any, dress joint surfaces square
for full depth of tile.
D.
Backs of Pieces: Gage units by dressing backs of pieces smooth and flat. When tested with a
24-inch straightedge, gap shall not exceed 1/32 inch.
2.6
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUTS
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where stone tile will be installed, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of installed tile.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, and clean; free of oil, waxy films, and
curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108
Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, consult Architect to adjust joint locations.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.2
BCB1011
PREPARATION
A.
Remove surface-applied finishes and adhesives from substrates.
B.
Remove coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials from substrates, including
curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone.
C.
For concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar, correct
conditions that do not comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series
of tile installation standards.
1.
2.
D.
Lay out tile patterns by marking joint lines on substrates to verify joint placement at edges,
corners, doors, and other critical elements.
1.
2.
E.
3.3
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound
according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product
specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when layout will be done.
Obtain Architect's approval of layout before starting tile installation.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated or needed to prevent grout from
staining or adhering to exposed stone tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of
temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with requirements of ANSI A108 that apply to types of
setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated.
1.
For tile floors, follow procedures in ANSI A108 for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
B.
TCA Installation Guidelines: Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" and
TCA installation methods indicated.
C.
Wipe backs of tiles with a damp cloth to remove dirt and dust before units are installed.
D.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
E.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
F.
Finish cut tile edges that will not be concealed by other construction by grinding and honing cut
surfaces to match factory-fabricated edges, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Match tiles within each space by selecting tiles to achieve uniformity of color and pattern.
Reject or relocate tiles that do not match color and pattern of adjacent tiles.
H.
Mix tiles to achieve a uniformly random distribution of color shadings and patterns.
1.
.
DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.4
BCB1011
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation in Level: For horizontal joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in
20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
B.
Variation in Surface Plane of Flooring: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level or slope
indicated when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.
C.
Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed the following differences
between faces of adjacent units as measured from a straightedge parallel to tiled surface:
1.
D.
3.5
Units with Honed Faces: 1/64 inch.
Hand-Tight Joints: Do not exceed 1/64 inch.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace material that is stained or otherwise damaged or that does not match
adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate
evidence of replacement.
B.
Clean stone tiles after setting and grouting is complete; use procedures recommended by stone
producer and manufacturer for types of application indicated.
C.
Apply sealer to cleaned stone tile flooring, according to sealer manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
B.
Protect stone tile flooring during construction period with kraft paper or other heavy covering of
type that will not stain or discolor stone.
C.
Before inspection for Material Completion, remove protective covering and clean surfaces using
procedures and materials recommended by grout and stone manufacturers.
END OF SECTION 09385
DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 09512 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
AC: Articulation Class.
B.
CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
C.
LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
D.
NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations
and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1.
2.
Ceiling suspension members.
Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a.
3.
4.
Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment
devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.
Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09512 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
BCB1011
Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch-long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
E.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F.
Field quality-control test reports.
G.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling.
H.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components and anchor
type.
I.
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAPaccredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 548. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document
accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the
test methods specified.
B.
Source Limitations:
1.
2.
C.
Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
following requirements:
1.
Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a.
b.
2.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surfaceburning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as
determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
a.
D.
Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the
effects of earthquake motions according to the following:
1.
Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint:
ASTM E 580.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
Comply with
09512 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
E.
1.6
BCB1011
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
COORDINATION
A.
1.9
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0
percent of quantity installed.
Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Armstrong
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09512 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
b.
c.
2.2
BCB1011
Celotex
United States Gypsum
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
1.
2.3
Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of
test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing
pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product
designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range
that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance,
acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL
CEILING APC-1
A.
Available Product:
1.
B.
Armstrong Cortega
Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type III,
mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted; and pattern as follows:
1.
Pattern: D (fissured).
C.
Color: White.
D.
LR: Not less than 0.80.
E.
NRC: Not less than 0.55.
F.
CAC: Not less than 35.
G.
Edge Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members.
H.
Thickness: 5/8”.
I.
Size: 24 by 24.
2.4
HIGH-DENSITY, CERAMIC- AND MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL
SCRUBBABLE FINISH FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC-2:
A.
PANELS
WITH
Available Product:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09512 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
B.
Armstrong Ceramaguard.
Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type XX,
other types; described as high-density, ceramic- and mineral-base panels with scrubbable
finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes.
1.
Pattern: CD (perforated, small holes and fissured).
C.
Color: White.
D.
LR: Not less than 0.80.
E.
NRC: Not less than 0.55.
F.
CAC: Not less than 38.
G.
Edge Detail: Square.
H.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
I.
Size: 24 by 24 inches.
2.5
BCB1011
WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL
CEILING APC-3
A.
Available Product:
1.
B.
Armstrong Sansera
Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type III,
mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted; and pattern as follows:
1.
Pattern: F (Heavily Textured).
C.
Color: White.
D.
LR: Not less than 0.73.
E.
NRC: Not less than 0.65.
F.
CAC: Not less than 35.
G.
Edge Detail: Angled reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members.
H.
Thickness: 3/4”.
Size: 24 by 24.
2.6
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09512 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide
manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
1.
C.
D.
BCB1011
High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification
for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
a.
Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors.
b.
Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC 1 service condition.
2.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.135-inch- diameter wire.
E.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch- thick,
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with
bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts.
G.
Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic
forces.
H.
Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical
panels in-place.
I.
Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24
inches o.c. on all cross tees.
J.
Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system designed to
absorb impact forces against acoustical panels.
2.7
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
A.
Products:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09512 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
B.
Armstrong Prelude MX for APC #1 & #3; XL for APC #2
Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated where required, Steel Suspension System: Main
and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished
15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.8
BCB1011
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
Cap Finish: Painted white.
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel
edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material,
finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1.
2.
2.9
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Celotex Corporation; Architectural Ceilings Marketing Dept.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Fry Reglet Corporation.
MM Systems, Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.
For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms
reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at
exposed suspension member.
For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required
to fit penetration exactly.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing
airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09512 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
3.2
BCB1011
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements
indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to
miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other
equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards and publications.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will
not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved.
Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age,
corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends
of each member.
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing
wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09512 - 8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
3.
BCB1011
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not
more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of
1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a.
Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space.
2.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of
reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having
jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel
manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fireresistance-rated assembly.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09512
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09512 - 9
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes carpet tile and installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation methods.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1.
2.
D.
E.
Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
Existing flooring materials to be removed.
Existing flooring materials to remain.
Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
Pattern of installation.
Pattern type, location, and direction.
Pile direction.
Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
Transition details to other flooring materials.
Carpet Tile Wall base installation and accessories.
Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch-long Samples.
Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
Maintenance Data: For carpet tile to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include the following:
1.
2.
CARPET TILE
Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
09681 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.4
BCB1011
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
B. Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, install mockups for each type of carpet tile installation
required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Install
mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed
Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
installed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Remove mockups when directed.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of
Material Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
D.
1.7
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tile,
install carpet tile before installing these items.
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Carpet Tile Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing to
replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty
period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,
CARPET TILE
09681 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10
percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
1.
1.8
Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s Standard
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET TILE: Provide Interface Nikki Ni, Style #16632, Color Yen # 2596
2.2
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided by or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and
that is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
1.
VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content
when tested according to ASTM D 5116:
a.
b.
c.
Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h.
Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
tile performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet tile installation
and comply with requirements specified.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1.
CARPET TILE
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
09681 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
3.
BCB1011
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive
carpet tile installation.
B.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C.
D.
3.3
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible
with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use
mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed
with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet Modules (Tiles)."
B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
C.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
D.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
E.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
F.
Install in quarter turn pattern, parallel to walls and borders.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1.
2.
3.
CARPET TILE
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
09681 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
B.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor
Installations."
C.
Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment
and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09681
CARPET TILE
09681 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior
items and surfaces.
1.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material
is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned,
paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish
is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1.
C.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
and labels.
1.
Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a.
Acoustical wall panels.
b.
Metal toilet enclosures.
c.
Elevator entrance doors and frames.
d.
Elevator equipment.
e.
Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
f.
Light fixtures.
2.
Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
spaces:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a.
b.
PAINTING
Foundation spaces.
Furred areas.
Ceiling plenums.
Pipe spaces.
Duct shafts.
Elevator shafts.
Anodized aluminum.
Stainless steel.
09900 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
c.
d.
e.
4.
D.
Valve and damper operators.
Linkages.
Sensing devices.
Motor and fan shafts.
Labels: Do not paint over UL or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Chromium plate.
Copper and copper alloys.
Bronze and brass.
Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
BCB1011
Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for traffic-marking paint.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at
an 85-degree meter.
Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at
a 60-degree meter.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
1.
2.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1.
C.
Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
PAINTING
09900 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until
required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each
Sample for location and application.
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
1.5
BCB1011
Concrete: 4-inch- square samples for each color and finish.
Painted Wood: 8-inch square Samples for each color and material on hardboard.
Stained or Natural Wood: 4-by-8-inch samples of natural- or stained-wood finish
on representative surfaces.
Ferrous Metal: 3-inch square Samples of flat metal for each color and finish.
Qualification Data: For Applicator.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
C.
Benchmark Samples: Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and
substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of
approved sample Submittals.
1.
Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each type of coating and substrate.
a.
b.
2.
Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after
permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide
required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
a.
3.
1.6
Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.
Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate
coating systems of a similar nature.
Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PAINTING
Product name or title of material.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
09900 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
7.
8.
B.
Color name and number.
VOC content.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1.
1.7
BCB1011
Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F.
B.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.
1.8
Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1.
Quantity: Furnish Owner with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below:
a.
Exterior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 1 gal. of each color applied.
b.
Interior, Flat Acrylic Paint: 1 gal of each color applied.
c.
Interior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 1 gal of each color applied.
d.
Interior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1 gal of each color applied.
e.
Interior, Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 1 gal of each color required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
B.
Manufacturers' Names:
Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PAINTING
Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints).
Devoe & Raynolds (Davoe).
Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).
Duron Paints and Wallcoverings (Duron).
Pittsburg Paints (PPG, Porter)
09900 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.2
BCB1011
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's BEST-QUALITY paint material of the various coating
types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable.
1.
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C.
Colors: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.
D.
Material type and Finish: As selected by Owner from Scheduled Exterior and Interior finishes
listed in this specification section. Finish will be provided with color selections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application.
1.
2.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1.
3.2
Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1.
B.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
PAINTING
09900 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
C.
BCB1011
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
2.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze.
If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of
surface preparation.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
b.
c.
PAINTING
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white
shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming,
fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on back side.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a.
5.
Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or
other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize
with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and
according to SSPC-SP 10.
Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash
coat before priming.
Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch
up with same primer as the shop coat.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
09900 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
D.
Material Preparation:
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
E.
3.3
BCB1011
Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple
coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
APPLICATION
A.
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match
exterior.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1.
2.
3.
4.
PAINTING
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended
by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
09900 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not
cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
D.
Minimum Coating Thickness:
Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
F.
Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket
material.
Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Switchgear to be left exposed in finished area.
Panelboards to be left exposed in finished areas.
Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
H.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
I.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
J.
Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of
even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks,
orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1.
PAINTING
Provide satin finish for final coats.
09900 - 8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
K.
3.4
BCB1011
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.5
Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as
Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1.
Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in the presence of Contractor.
2.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used
does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the
noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying
paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two
coatings are incompatible.
CLEANING
A.
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from Project site.
1.
3.6
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished
surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1.
3.7
After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following
finish systems over exterior concrete, stucco, and brick masonry substrates:
1.
Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
2.
PAINTING
Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
09900 - 9
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
a.
b.
B.
2.
Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Smooth Wood: Provide the following finish systems over smooth wood siding, wood trim, and
other smooth exterior wood surfaces:
1.
Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for concrete, masonry, and wood.
Wood Trim: Provide the following finish systems over exterior wood trim:
1.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
2.
Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
E.
Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
a.
b.
D.
Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete unit
Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
a.
b.
C.
Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Concrete Unit Masonry:
masonry:
1.
BCB1011
Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for concrete, masonry, and wood.
Plywood: Provide the following finish systems over exterior plywood:
1.
Low-Luster Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
PAINTING
Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.
09900 - 10
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
F.
Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not
required on shop-primed items.
1.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a.
b.
2.
2.
Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a.
b.
Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a.
b.
Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals.
Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces:
1.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
2.
Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes.
Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
3.8
Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.
Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals.
Zinc-Coated Metal:
surfaces:
1.
H.
Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.
Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a.
b.
G.
BCB1011
Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes.
Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals.
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
systems over interior concrete and brick masonry substrates:
1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
2.
Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.
Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
PAINTING
Provide the following paint
Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.
09900 - 11
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
B.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
a.
b.
Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Primer: Interior gypsum board primer (tinted).
Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.
Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
Primer: Interior gypsum board primer (tinted).
Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
Primer: Interior gypsum board primer (tinted).
Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Wood and Hardboard:
surfaces:
1.
b.
2.
Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater.
a.
Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel
finishes.
Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood primer.
a.
b.
E.
Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.
Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
a.
b.
D.
Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry:
1.
C.
BCB1011
Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel
finishes.
Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel.
Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
PAINTING
09900 - 12
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
2.
2.
Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats ver a primer.
a.
b.
3.
Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal
Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats ver a primer.
a.
b.
Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel.
All-Service Jacket over Insulation: Provide the following finish system on cotton or canvas
insulation covering:
1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two inish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a.
3.9
Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel.
Zinc-Coated Metal:
surfaces:
1.
G.
Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
F.
Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
3.
BCB1011
Finish Coats: Interior flat latex-emulsion size.
INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE
A.
Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork:
1.
Waterborne Stain Satin-Varnish Finish: Two Finish coats of waterborne clear satin
varnish over a sealer coat and waterborne interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before
applying stain.
a.
b.
c.
d.
PAINTING
Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler.
Stain Coat: Interior wood stain.
Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear satin varnish.
09900 - 13
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
Waterborne Stain Full-Gloss Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear fullgloss varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe filler before applying stain.
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
BCB1011
Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler.
Stain Coat: Interior wood stain.
Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear gloss varnish.
Natural-Finish Woodwork: Provide the following natural finishes over new interior woodwork:
1.
Waterborne Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear satin varnish over
a sanding sealer. Wipe wood filler before applying stain.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler.
Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear satin varnish.
Waterborne Full-Gloss Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear full-gloss
varnish over a sealer coat. Wipe filler before applying stain.
a.
b.
c.
Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler.
Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear gloss varnish.
END OF SECTION 09900
PAINTING
09900 - 14
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes plastic-laminate units as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced.
Urinal Screens: Floor anchored.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry for blocking.
Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, and
similar accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated.
D.
Samples for Verification: Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inchsquare Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction
contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
BCB1011
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating toilet compartments without
field measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC-LAMINATE UNITS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
All American Metal Corp.
2.
American Sanitary Partition Corporation.
3.
Ampco.
4.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
5.
Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.
6.
Flush Metal Partition Corp.
7.
Global Steel Products Corp.
8.
Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company.
B.
Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS, 0.048-inch nominal thickness.
1.
C.
Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.
Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Plastic-laminate facing sheets are pressure laminated
to core material without splices or joints in facings or cores. Laminate is applied to edges
before broad surfaces to seal edges and prevent laminate from being pried loose. Exposed
core material is sealed at cutouts to protect core from moisture.
1.
2.
3.
Core Material: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 particleboard with 45-lb density.
Doors and Panels: Finished to not less than 1 inch thick.
Pilasters: Provide construction to comply with the following:
a.
Finished to 1-1/4 inches thick and with manufacturer's standard core of corrosionresistant steel sheet laminated to both sides of honeycomb of resin-impregnated
kraft paper in lieu of particleboard core.
D.
Pilaster Shoes: Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, not less than 0.0312 inch
specified thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware.
E.
Brackets (Fittings):
1.
2.2
Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware
and accessories.
1.
Material: Stainless steel.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
B.
Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with
antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C.
Support Posts for Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum post with floor shoe for
anchoring to floor construction.
D.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel,
finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for throughbolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant,
protective-coated steel.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling
mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for
setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to
conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
B.
Floor-Anchored Units:
Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring
assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at
pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
C.
Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet
compartments and 36-inch-wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide clear opening
for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors
open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide
units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at
compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides
of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight,
level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring
devices.
1.
Maximum Clearances:
a.
b.
Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.
Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
BCB1011
Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less three brackets
attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.
a.
b.
Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B.
Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure
continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops
of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when
doors are in closed position.
C.
Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into
structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb,
and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters
when doors are in closed position.
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 10155
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
1.3
Toilet and bath accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions,
profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory
specified.
B.
Samples: For each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.
1.
Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
C.
Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation
instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.
D.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and
room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.
E.
Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for
units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
B.
Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions,
capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath
Accessory Schedule.
1.
Products of other manufacturers with equal characteristics, as judged solely by Architect,
may be provided.
2.Products of other manufacturers listed in Part 2 with equal characteristics, as judged solely
by Architect, may be provided.
3.Other manufacturers' products with equal characteristics may be considered. See Division 1
Section "Substitutions."
4.Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Architect for review.
1.5
COORDINATION
10801 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for
access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of
accessories.
B.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying
the Work.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and
run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
accessories that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Toilet and Bath Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.2
A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
American Specialties, Inc.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Bradley Corporation.
General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch minimum nominal
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and
flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings.
C.
Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch minimum nominal
thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
D.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).
E.
Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus
chromium electrodeposited on base metal.
F.
Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating.
G.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
H.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft
resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
General:
One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as
10801 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not
exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped
nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B.
General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On interior surface
not exposed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or
stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
C.
Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams
and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainlesssteel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to
substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly
anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.3
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE:
A.
Surface Mounted Soap Dispenser: Bobrick B-2112 , Foam Valve or equal.
END OF SECTION 10801
10801 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 12494 - ROLLER SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes roller shades and motorized shade operators.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for
mounting roller shades and accessories.
Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls,
limit switches, and other powered devices and for system disconnect switches for
motorized shade operation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,
construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and
operating instructions.
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections,
details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings,
attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.
1.
2.
C.
Motorized Shade Operators:
Show locations and details for installing operator
components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical characteristics, drive
arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, system, and control wiring.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations
and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Motorized Shade Operators: Include operating instructions.
Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements.
Ceiling suspension system members and attachment to building structure.
Shade mounting assembly and attachment.
Size and location of access to shade operator, motor, and adjustable components.
Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot (1:96).
Samples for Initial Selection:
indicated.
ROLLER SHADES
For each colored component of each type of roller shade
12494 - 1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
E.
BCB1011
Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
Samples for Verification:
1.
For the following products:
a.
b.
Shade Material: Not less than 12-inch square section of fabric, from dye lot used
for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat.
Mark top and face of material.
Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches long.
F.
Window Treatment Schedule: Include roller shades in schedule using same room designations
indicated on Drawings.
G.
Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade product, signed by product manufacturer.
H.
Product Test Reports: For each type of roller shade product.
I.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
J.
Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes.
Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics,
finishes, and performance.
Operating hardware.
Motorized shade operator.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of roller shades
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction:
1.
Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
2.
1.5
BCB1011
Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Material Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-testresponse characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on
Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish
work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B.
Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation
hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.2
Basis for Design: Lutron
ROLLER SHADES
A.
Available Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Basis for Design:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Color: From Manufacturer’s full line
Texture: SheerSade
Pattern: Basketweave XL2
Shade Band Material: PVC-coated fiberglass.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Material Width: 96 inches.
Bottom Hem: Straight.
Trim: As indicated by manufacturer's designation for style and color.
Material Solar Optical Properties: As indicated by selected color.
Material Openness Factor: Not exceeding 10%
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
6.
BCB1011
Material Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C.
Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and
wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the
weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from
support brackets; with manufacturer's standard method for attaching shade material. Provide
capacity for one roller shade band per roller.
D.
Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
E.
Mounting Brackets:
headbox].
F.
Fascia: L-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled;
continuous panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware
and operators; removable design for access.
G.
Top/Back Cover: L shaped; material and finish to match fascia; combining with fascia and end
caps to form a six-sided headbox enclosure sized to fit shade roller and operating hardware
inside.
H.
Pocket-Style Headbox: U-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges
returned or rolled; with a bottom cover consisting of slot opening of minimum dimension to allow
lowering and raising of shade and a removable or openable, continuous metal access panel
concealing shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators within.
I.
Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum, with plastic or metal capped ends. Provide exposedto-view, external-type bottom bar with concealed weight bar as required for smooth, properly
balanced shade operation.
J.
Shade Operation: Motorized operator.
K.
Valance: As indicated by manufacturer's designation for style and color.
L.
Mounting: Recessed in ceiling pocket mounting permitting easy removal and replacement
without damaging roller shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes.
M.
Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard for anchoring roller shade
bottom in place and keeping shade band material taut.
2.3
Fascia end caps, fabricated from steel finished to match fascia or
ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A.
Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a
flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the
roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade.
B.
Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
1.
C.
Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C):
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.
BCB1011
Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch
from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each
shade is installed.
D.
Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting
fascia,[headbox, roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting
method indicated.
E.
Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.
F.
Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard
baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
G.
Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View:
manufacturer's full range unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
As selected by Architect from
MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADE OPERATORS
A.
General: Provide factory-assembled motorized shade operation systems designed for lifting
shades of type, size, weight, construction, use, and operation frequency indicated. Provide
operation systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories
suitable for Project conditions and recommended by shade manufacturer, complete with electric
motors and factory-prewired motor controls, remote-control stations, remote-control devices,
power disconnect switches, enclosures protecting controls and all operating parts, and
accessories required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor
controls to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with
the building electrical system.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6.
D.
Electric Motors: UL-approved asynchronous, totally enclosed, insulated, capacitor-start motors,
complying with NEMA MG 1, with thermal overload protection, brake, permanently lubricated
bearings, and limit switches; sized by shade manufacturer to start and operate size and weight
of shade considering service factor or considering Project's service conditions without
exceeding nameplate ratings.
1.
2.
3.
Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.
Motor Characteristics: Single phase, 110V, 60 Hz.
Motor Mounting: Within manufacturer's standard roller enclosure.
E.
Position of Motor and Electrical Connection: Left or Right side of roller, as determined by hand
of user facing shade from inside, unless otherwise.
F.
Remote Controls: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed mounting.
Provide the following devices for remote-control activation of shades:
1.
Control Stations: Momentary-contact, three-position, rocker-style, wall switch-operated
control station with open, close, and center off functions.
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
a.
b.
BCB1011
Color: As indicated to match electrical devices elsewhere in the room..
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide manufacturer’s
standard.
G.
Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically
stop shade at fully raised and fully lowered positions.
H.
Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at any position.
I.
Operating Features: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Group switching with integrated switch control; single face plate for multiple switch cutouts.
Capable of interface with audiovisual control system.
Override switch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of
connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed
with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A.
Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written
instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass.
Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
B.
Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Material
Completion.
C.
Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
before time of Material Completion.
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.5
BCB1011
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain systems. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures
Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 12494
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 INTERPRETATION OF SPECIFICATIONS:
1.2
1.3
A.
General provisions and requirements apply throughout. Cross references or general
provisions may be repeated for convenience or emphasis only.
B.
Interpret the following as indicated:
1.
"or equal": "in accordance with the General Conditions", or "an equivalent with
respect to style and function."
2.
"approved": "approved or accepted by Governing Officials or the authorities having
jurisdiction".
3.
"provide": "furnish and install, connect, and test, and contract for the performance
of same."
4.
"wiring":
"required conductors or cable and raceway system, including fittings,
boxes, connectors, supports, hardware, labeling, and miscellaneous
related accessories."
5.
"work":
"materials completely provided," which shall include all activities
and services necessary to meet contract requirements, including
inspection and replacement as specified of any defective
element."
6.
"materials": "equipment and/or materials."
7.
":":
"shall be/have" Specifications following a colon are criteria which apply to
the term preceding the colon.
SUBSTITUTIONS:
A.
Utilize only those materials specifically listed by the Contract Documents. Substitutions of
alternative types of major materials will not be acceptable unless a written "prior" acceptance
is obtained at least seven (7) working days before the Date for Submittal of Bids. Requests
for prior acceptance of alternative materials must conform to the procedures for submitting
shop drawings and product data.
B.
The design and layout shown on the plans are based on the manufacturer indicated on the
equipment schedule. If equipment other than that used as the basis of design is submitted
for use on this project, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to submit a revised
drawing of the layout, showing the location, clearances for access and service. Changes to
architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, ductwork, or plumbing systems shall be the
responsibility of the contractor, including costs for redesign of these systems. Submittals
shall clearly indicate any required changes to the building systems affected by substitution of
equipment.
GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK:
A.
Bidders are advised to visit the site and examine the existing conditions before submitting
bids, as no allowance will be made for lack of knowledge of existing conditions where such
conditions might reasonably be determined by observation.
B.
The Contract Documents establish the basic systems designs and the detail design of the
work, or establish systems or materials performance criteria and minimum design
requirements. In either case, certain aspects of the work or of the detail design are not
established completely. Establish said work and details in accordance with industry norms
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
and practice to suit the needs of the job. The work shall provide for complete systems and
services unless otherwise specified herein.
C.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
1.4
The work covered by this specification shall include furnishing supervision, labor, supplies,
materials, equipment, tools, services, taxes and dollar costs required to construct and install
the complete mechanical systems as specified herein and as shown by the plans and other
relevant documents. Without limiting the generality thereof, the major items of the work are:
Utility connections and metering, including temporary connections.
Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning system.
Plumbing system, including potable water and sanitary sewer.
Control systems and wiring for systems provided.
Specialty systems as specified or shown by plans.
Special tools for maintenance or inspection of materials.
Necessary services and support work, including scaffolding, and hoisting.
Permits, inspection fees, approvals, licenses, registrations, certificates, taxes, and
specified or miscellaneous dollar costs.
Shop Drawings and Product Data Submittals as specified.
Inspections, tests, and systems and equipment demonstrations.
Documentation and notifications.
Materials transportation, delivery, handling, storage, protection, guarding and
inspecting.
Instruction of Owner's Operating and Maintenance Personnel.
Temporary utility and site distribution system(s).
Demonstration of completion of the work.
Replacement of Defective Work.
CODES AND STANDARDS:
A.
The mechanical installation, equipment, materials and workmanship shall as a minimum be
in accordance with the requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the
following:
International Building Code.
International Plumbing Code.
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning:
International Mechanical Code (Georgia Amendments)
NFPA 90A and NFPA 96
Applicable federal, state, and local laws, codes, ordinances, and rulings of Governing
Officials having jurisdiction.
Utility and service company regulations and requirements.
B.
Codes and standards cited establish only the minimum requirements for the work. Where
requirements of the Contract Documents exceed requirements of the Codes and Standards,
provide the work in accordance with the express requirements of the Contract Documents.
Do not reduce the quality of the design or eliminate future capacity or options without
acceptance by the Engineer, even if proposed changes meet minimum Code requirements.
C.
The latest edition of the specifications, standards, and listings of the following organization
are made a part of this specification. Mechanical work, unless otherwise indicated, shall
comply with their requirements and recommendations wherever applicable:
1.
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
2.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
3.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
4.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
5.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.5
1.6
COMPLIANCE OF WORK WITH CODES AND ORDINANCES:
A.
Comply with the requirements of local ordinances and Codes as modified and amended by
Governing Officials having jurisdiction.
B.
Notify the Architect in writing of any instance where any requirement of the Contract
Documents is in conflict with any Code or ordinance, so that any required changes may be
made in a timely manner and without the need for remedial work. Do not perform work
contrary to Codes, ordinances, regulations, or rulings of Governing Officials.
RELATED WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS:
A.
The following work is generally specified by other Divisions of specifications:
Temporary water supply and temporary sanitary convenience.
Fire extinguisher and fire extinguisher cabinets.
Toilet accessories.
Foundation drain tile.
Catchbasins or manholes.
Installation of building access panels and plaster frames.
Flashing and Pitchpockets for roof mounted equipment.
Roof openings and outside wall openings.
Cutting and patching of structural elements, walls, floors, ceilings, or roof.
Structural platforms.
Louvers and screens.
Building access panels.
Painting.
B.
Electrical power work is covered by Division 16 specifications, including the following:
1.
Installation of individually mounted motor starters, controllers (starters), contactors,
and related power wiring.
2.
Power wiring of motors, heaters, fans, etc. and furnishing, installation and wiring of
individually mounted safety switches.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
1.7
PERMITS AND COSTS:
A.
1.8
BCB1011
Obtain and pay for permits, assessments, taxes, fees, licenses, etc. necessary for the
installation of the work. Deliver to the Owner all such certificates of inspection or occupancy
issued by Governing Officials.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA:
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Submittals:
Fully in accordance with and consistent with the General Conditions, and with the
requirements of the technical specifications and plans.
Product and equipment submittals shall be grouped together in 3 ring binders, with separators
between types of equipment. Each submittal binder shall contain a table of contents
listing the items contained therein by number and name. Do not submit multiple, loose
copies.
Include catalog cuts, bulletins, plates, drawings, diagrams, schedules, and any other
information as necessary to indicate the relative characteristics, ratings, and capacities of
the respective items of equipment.
Clearly and fully state any technical exceptions in one place.
Check for accuracy and coordinate between the involved trades before submission for
review and acceptance by the Engineer.
Check electrical service for any equipment requiring power to ensure that equipment
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
submitted matches the power systems for the project, including voltage and phase.
B.
Shop Drawings:
Prepare shop drawings, of a scale not less than that of the contract plans, giving
locations for major equipment, ductwork, and piping, based on equipment to be installed.
Space in the mechanical room is critical; submittals must have mechanical room layouts with
actual equipment.
Show the location and weight of each item of roof mounted equipment, roof openings,
pads, sleeves, anchor bolts, etc.,
Show all clearances recommended by the manufacturer for the service or removal of
equipment/ materials.
Notify the Architect in writing where shop drawings indicate elevations of piping or
ducts which would place pipe or duct below lighting fixtures or ceilings, or that would require
the lowering of lighting fixtures or ceilings.
Coordinate the structural, architectural and systems changes required for the
mechanical equipment actually used on the project.
6.
Submit sheet metal shop drawings, based on field measurements of actual conditions
and the equipment submitted and approved for this project. Sheet metal shop
drawings shall clearly indicate all changes required to accommodate actual field
conditions such as interference with structural or other building elements and
systems.
C.
Each shop drawing, product data sheet, catalog cut, etc. submitted shall bear on its face an
acceptance date and signature of the Contractor, indicating that the submission has been
checked and accepted for installation by the Contractor.
D.
The Engineer's review of shop drawings and product data shall not change the requirements
of the contract documents, nor shall this review relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for
any and all errors or omissions in said documentation.
E.
Provide six (6) copies of each submittal to the Architect for appropriate distribution and
action. Four (4) copies of each submittal shall be returned to the Contractor. Three (3)
copies of each final submittal shall be included in the project manuals.
F.
Submit shop drawings and product data for review for major systems and materials,
including:
Cleanouts
Domestic Water Heaters
-Floor Drains
Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories
Plumbing Specialties
Wall Hydrants
Air Distribution Products and Accessories
Air Conditioning and Heating Units with coil, fan, filter, and compressor data
Condensing Units
Dampers
Duct Lining
Ductwork and accessories
Equipment Layout Drawings
Fans (with curves for fans 1/2 HP and larger)
Flexible Ductwork
Insulation (duct and pipe)
Motor Controls
Refrigerant Piping Diagrams
Refrigerant Piping Specialties
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
1.9
BCB1011
Sheet Metal Work
Temperature Control System including control diagrams, control panel layouts,
descriptions of operation and cuts of instruments
DOCUMENTATION, MANUALS AND RECORD PLANS:
A.
Prepare manuals containing certificates or letters of warranty or guarantee, operating and
maintenance instructions and recommendations, test results, and other data specified
herein, and deliver the manuals to the Owner's Representative upon completion of the work.
These manuals shall include information on major materials (such as major equipment) and
on special systems or materials. Any special tools required for service or repair shall be
listed.
B.
Manuals:
1.
Ring binders with the name of the manual, project, Architect, Engineer and Contractor
placed on the cover of each manual.
2.
Each manual shall contain a table of contents listing the items contained therein by
number and name. Each item shall be properly indexed with a standard metal
reinforced cover page tab, with item number and name printed on tab per se.
C.
Provide Installation, Operation, and Maintenance (IOM) Manuals for major materials
(equipment) in separate manuals, or sets of manuals, for each major system or item of
material. IOM Manuals shall contain the following items of information:
Manufacturer's maintenance and operation recommendations.
Final (corrected) shop drawings and product data information.
As-built control diagrams.
Step-by-step starting and stopping procedures for each major item of equipment and
related system.
Service telephone number of any installing Equipment Supplier or Manufacturer.
Executed Guarantee/ Warranty Cards and related beginning and ending period dates
for each item of material/equipment.
D.
Make written certification to the Architect that tests, checks, verifications, and settings have
been satisfactorily completed. Where any item cannot be certified as correct, make a written
report of the relevant facts and test data.
E.
Have bonds, guarantees, receipts, affidavits, etc., called for in the various specification
articles prepared and signed in advance of final demonstration of completion and
acceptance of the work. Deliver to the Architect at or before the time of inspection with a
letter of transmittal, listing each item included.
F.
On a set of contract documents, maintain an accurate record of all deviations made during
the progress of the work from the contract documents (plans and specifications). Also,
maintain an accurate as-built record of the dimensional locations of outside underground
materials such as meters, valves, and incoming utility lines, piping, or conduits. The markedup (record) documents shall be available on the site for inspection during normal working
hours.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.10 SCHEDULING AND CONDUCT OF THE WORK:
A.
Perform work on schedule and in a manner as described by the Special Conditions of the
Specifications and by Division 15 specifications. Plan, coordinate, and execute the work to
meet building schedules and so as not to produce interference between the work of the
various trades, or with any special job site construction.
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
B.
Specified tests may be witnessed by the Architect or Engineer, at their option. Provide at
least five (5) days notice to the Architect of each test schedule, so that the Architect and
Engineer may plan to attend the test if desired.
C.
The Architect or Engineer may inspect the site at any time, at their option. In order that they
may plan to inspect the job after the installation of major materials and before the materials
are enclosed from ready view, notify Architect at least five (5) days in advance of the
following construction milestones:
*
Underground piping installed, but prior to slab being placed or trenches backfilled.
*
Ductwork or piping installed, but before installation of walls or dropped ceilings, and
before application of any insulation.
1.11 TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY:
A.
Provide and pay for the transportation, storage and handling of materials. Materials shall be
delivered to the job site in ample quantities to provide for the uninterrupted progress of work
as scheduled. Where necessary, provide expedited or special shipping or handling of
materials to prevent interruption of the overall job progress.
1.12 SPECIALIZED SERVICES:
A.
Provide any necessary specialized services, such as accredited direct factory
representative, as may be required for survey, inspection, supervision, installation,
calibration, test, placing of equipment into operation, or for trouble shooting during the period
of replacement of defective work.
B.
Provide for the installation of control systems and related low voltage (generally 50 volts or
less) wiring for the building systems covered by Division 15 specifications. Control systems
and wiring shall meet the requirements of Division 16 specifications.
1.13 GUARANTEES / WARRANTIES:
A.
Leave the entire mechanical system installed under this contract in proper working order.
Replace any work or material which develops defects, except from ordinary wear and tear,
within one (1) year from the date of beneficial acceptance by the Owner.
B.
Air Conditioning Compressors: a one (1) year manufacturer's guarantee against defective
parts and labor, and an additional four (4) year manufacturer's guarantee on the compressor
for replacement of parts only. For these compressors, the period for replacement by the
Contractor of defective work shall be extended an additional four (4) years for services
related to securing parts only.
C.
The materials of the mechanical systems shall have the manufacturer's and/or supplier's
guarantee or warranty put into effect by execution and filing of any and all related papers.
For one (1) year from the date of acceptance, obtain service or repair under the terms of any
said guarantee or warranty in the Owner's behalf.
D.
For a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance, upon receipt of notification from the
Architect of the failure of any material or workmanship, replace the failed material or
workmanship, including removal and replacement, or repair.
1.14 WORK RELATED TO EXISTING SYSTEMS:
A.
The existing installation is to remain in place and in service except as otherwise indicated.
Perform all work necessary to properly tie in the new work with the existing work and adapt
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
the existing installation to the changes. Verify the size and location of existing piping and
equipment at the site.
B.
Remove exposed ductwork, piping, and controls rendered useless due to changes in the
building.
C.
Remove or reconnect concealed ductwork, piping and controls exposed by the removal of
walls, partitions, etc. as required.
D.
Plug open outlets in piping, and blank-off openings in ductwork.
E.
Reconnect equipment or fixtures which are to remain in service, but are temporarily
disconnected, and restore to original operating condition.
F.
Exercise care in removing plumbing fixtures which are to be reused so they are not
damaged. Protect fixtures which are to remain in place with wood boxes or covers.
G.
Sleeves left open by the removal of piping shall be cut flush with the finished slab or wall
then filled with cement grout and finished flush with both sides of the slab or wall.
H.
Do not use existing material and equipment which has been removed in the new work.
I.
Piping that has been used for any other purpose than domestic water supply shall not be
installed in domestic water supply lines.
J.
Existing water piping under the slab which is not reused shall be cut and capped outside the
slab so that no unused water piping left under the floor is connected to the water supply.
K.
Remove existing material not reused from the premises.
L.
Clean all existing air distribution devices which remain or are reused. Rebalance existing air
system to produce the air distribution shown.
M.
Remove, relocate, plug, or cap existing gas, sewer and water lines, manholes, catch basins,
hydrants, and meters in the area of construction as directed. Re-arrange those that are to
remain in service for proper connections.
N.
Where existing insulation is damaged due to new work, repair to match the existing
insulation, or replace with insulation as specified for the new work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS:
A.
Equipment and materials: new, of the best quality and grade of the relative quality
established, of manufacturer's standard, established product line. Where applicable
standards are established, shall conform to National Board of Fire Underwriter's
requirements and bear the seal of approval of a recognized and approved testing agency, as
accepted by the Engineer.
B.
Consistently maintain a product line throughout the entire installation.
C.
Equipment and components that interact to form equipment assemblies and/or systems shall
be of the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.2
2.3
2.4
1.
2.
BCB1011
BUILDING ACCESS PANELS:
A.
Building access panels:
1.
Metal construction with hinged door and an inconspicuous frame
2.
Size required to provide proper access for maintenance and service, with a minimum
size of 18 X 18-inches.
3.
"B" label where installed in rated walls.
B.
Milcor "DW", or equal, for drywall locations and Milcor "K", or equal, elsewhere.
PAINT:
A.
Paint used for touching up factory painted apparatus shall be top quality and selected to
match the factory finish.
B.
Cold galvanizing compound: Sherwin-Williams "Zinc-Clad Primer" or equal.
C.
Rust Preventative paint: "Rust-Oleum" or equal.
MOTOR CONTROLLERS AND ACCESSORIES:
A.
Provide motor controllers for all motors specified under Division 15. Motors shall be NEMA
“Premium” efficiency, conforming with NEMA MG 1-2006.
B.
Motor controllers: General Electric, Allen Bradley Co., Allis-Chalmers Manufacturing Co.,
Westinghouse Electric Corp., or Cutler-Hammer.
C.
Motors 1/2 H.P. and larger: Full voltage magnetic starters with three (3) overloads shall be
in combination with a properly sized three (3) pole molded-case circuit breaker, and 120 V.
control transformer with fused primary leads and hot secondary lead, all in a N.E.M.A. 1
enclosure unless installed exposed to weather, then N.E.M.A. 3R enclosure. Furnish
auxiliary contacts and interlocks as required for control functions.
D.
Motors 1/3 H.P. and smaller: Magnetic starters where required for automatic control,
otherwise furnish manual starters. Where motors have built in thermal overload protection
furnish contactors for automatically controlled motors and motor rated toggle switches for
manually controlled motors.
E.
Motors for equipment serviced by variable speed drives shall be inverter-rated motors
conforming to NEMA MG-1, Part 3, 1.15 service factor and class “F” insulation.
F.
Provide motor control accessories such as pilot lights, pushbuttons and selector (H-O-A)
switches as a part of the apparatus which they operate, located in the starter cover.
Automatically controlled equipment shall be furnished with a "Hand-Off-Auto" switch and
pilot light; manually controlled equipment shall be furnished with "On-Off" switch and pilot
light.
G.
Starters and electrical control devices other than those located in mechanical rooms, control
panels, and storage rooms: flush mounted type with locking covers.
H.
Nameplates:
Engraved laminated bakelite panel, secured with screws.
Provide a nameplate identifying the equipment served for starter, pushbutton station,
and thermal overload switch.
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-8
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.5
BCB1011
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS:
A.
Electrical materials: Division 16 specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
GENERAL DESIGN AND WORK:
A.
Read and study relevant documents, including Codes. Become familiar with the site, the
scope of work and services, type of general construction, and the civil, structural,
architectural, interior design, mechanical, electrical and special system plans and
specifications.
B.
Establish design and work details to provide for the complete installation of materials and the
successful operation of systems. Notify the Engineer in writing, in a timely manner if
responsibilities or directions are not clear, or if assistance is desired in determining the
needs or requirements for any particular item.
INTERFERENCES AND COORDINATION:
A.
The plans showing mechanical work are generally diagrammatic in nature. The plans shall
not be scaled for any dimension.
B.
Coordinate the work with that of different trades so that interferences between the
mechanical work and other work will be avoided. Refer to building plans for guidance as to
dimensions, finished grades, ceiling heights, door swings, room finishes, location of ducts,
pipes, equipment, outlets and similar details that are required, and coordinate final
installation with work as actually installed. Outlets and connections for equipment or devices
to be installed by different trades shall be coordinated to assure that the outlets and
connections are properly sized and located with respect to the equipment served and the
surrounding areas.
C.
Offsets and fittings in lines, and adjustments to equipment and fixture locations, as accepted
by the Owner's representative, shall be provided to accomplish the work in a satisfactory
manner.
D.
If interference develops, the Owner's representative shall decide which item of equipment,
ductwork, piping, conduit, etc. must be relocated, regardless of the sequence of installation
of the affected items.
SPACE REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Materials:
1.
Fit into the space provided in the building or property.
Install at such time and in such manner as to avoid damage to the building structure
or property
Install as required by the job progress.
B.
Materials requiring normal servicing or maintenance shall be made easily accessible,
including associated connection devices, wiring and/or piping.
C.
Ductwork, piping, raceways, and supports
1.
Maintain as close as possible to walls, floor slabs, columns, etc., so as to take up a
2.
3.
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-9
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
3.
3.4
A.
3.6
3.7
minimum amount of space. Provide offsets and fittings required to accomplish this.
Do not be locate within 42-inches of switchboards, panelboards or motor control
centers, including the space horizontally from the electrical equipment , and the space
from floor to structural ceiling over electrical equipment.
Conceal in public or finished spaces.
WORKMANSHIP:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
BCB1011
Workmanship:
Of the highest quality.
No substandard work will be accepted.
Work shall be done by workmen skilled in the trade involved.
PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A.
Protect materials from the elements and other causes of damage during shipment, storage,
and erection, until final acceptance by the Owner.
B.
During construction, cover the fronts of equipment to prevent marring or defacing.
C.
Close open ends of ductwork, pipe, or conduit with temporary closures or plugged when
work is stopped, to prevent debris from entering.
D.
Install filters in air handling systems before any operation of the system. Exhaust fans may
be protected using temporary filters cut from roll media and fastened over air inlets.
INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS:
A.
Install materials
1.
In accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations for installation
2.
In accordance with any listing restrictions of a certifying laboratory or agency
3.
In accordance with the requirements of involved Government Agencies or local
Governing Officials.
B.
Materials: set level, square and plumb, properly oriented, aligned and secured in the location
indicated.
C.
Lock washers: install under nuts which bear on metal.
D.
Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of dirt, dust, oil and rust.
E.
Where galvanizing is broken during fabrication or installation (including tack welding), recoat
exposed areas with cold galvanizing compound.
F.
Paint exposed iron or steel materials such as ductwork, piping, conduits and supports (but
not equipment, devices, and components), including those exterior to the building, where
exposed to view without removing ceilings or access panels with one coat of rust inhibiting
paint. The type and color of paint shall be acceptable to the Architect.
G.
Paint materials and supports above ceilings, but visible through grilles or diffusers, etc.,flat
black unless inappropriate due to listing restrictions or function.
BUILDING ACCESS PANELS:
A.
Provide building access panels where required to provide access for service and
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-10
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
maintenance for equipment, fans, heaters, ductwork, damper operators, valves, traps,
instruments, etc., including associated connection devices, wiring and/or piping. In general,
only one (1) access panel shall be provided for an item of equipment and associated
connecting devices, wiring and/or piping. Where feasible one access panel may serve
several items of equipment.
3.8
3.9
B.
Coordinate access panel location and size with materials/ equipment served to allow for
installation, operation, inspection and maintenance as necessary, including testing and
recalibrating. Access panels for fire dampers and/or duct smoke detectors shall allow
resetting of the dampers and/or detectors.
C.
Access panels are not required for materials above lay-in (push-up) ceiling systems.
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND MATERIALS:
A.
Provide supports for properly mounting materials. Supports shall provide adequate and rigid
mounting for materials. Supports shall be fabricated and installed in a neat and workmanlike
manner, and care shall be taken that at no time shall any portion of the building structure be
overloaded or weakened.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, select and size foundations, supports, and fasteners.
CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A.
Coordinate with the various trades sufficiently ahead of the construction of any floor, wall,
ceiling, roof, or other element, and identify openings, foundations, pads, curbs, and inserts
that will be required for the work. Do not cut any structural member without having received
written permission from the Architect.
3.10 CLEANING:
A.
Clean equipment, fixtures, devices and other materials furnished or set in place. Remove
plaster, paint, stickers, rust, stains, and other foreign matter or discoloration. Surfaces shall
be polished and free of paint, oil, grease, and other dirt and debris. Touch up or refinish
materials which have been damaged or marred during the construction process.
3.11 LUBRICATION:
A.
After installation of equipment, motors and equipment components, lubricate as
recommended by the manufacturer.
3.12 MARKING AND LABELING:
A.
Provide marking and labeling for major items of equipment, controls, and materials.
B.
Stencil air conditioning units and fans with system numbers in a prominent location using
minimum size 2-inch high block letters.
3.13 CHECKS AND TESTS:
A.
B.
C.
Make tests as reasonably required by the Engineer to prove the integrity of the work, and
leave the complete installation in first class condition and ready for operation.
Thoroughly test and demonstrate individual systems to meet full functional requirements.
See other sections of the specifications for specific testing requirements.
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-11
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
3.14 DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLETION:
A.
Demonstrate that
1.
The project is completely installed and calibrated and suitable for acceptance
by the Owner.
2.
The work is completed in a proper and workmanlike manner.
3.
The work in installed in accordance with the intent of the plans and
specifications
4.
The installation is safe for use by building occupants, including operating
personnel.
3.15 INSTRUCTIONS TO OPERATING PERSONNEL:
A.
Instruct Facility Operating Personnel in the safe and correct procedures for cleaning,
checking, logging, lubricating, testing, trouble shooting and operating of equipment and
systems. Conduct instruction at the job site by qualified personnel of the Contractor,
Supplier, or Manufacturer. Review the operation instructions and maintenance
recommendations with qualified Facility Operating Personnel.
END OF SECTION
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-12
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 15040 - TEST, ADJUST AND BALANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION:
A.
Perform testing, adjustment and start-up of mechanical systems as described herein.
B.
Testing and balancing shall be performed by an independent test and balance agency that
specializes in and whose business is limited to testing and balancing of air conditioning
systems. The Engineer, acting for the Owner, shall approve this agency, which shall be one
fully certified by AABC or NEBB.
C.
Testing and balancing agency, as part of it's contract, shall act as authorized inspection
agency, responsible to the Engineer and Owner, and shall, during the test and balance, list
all items that are not installed correctly, require correction, or have not been installed in
accordance with contract documents.
D.
Testing and balancing shall be performed in complete accordance with AABC National
Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Provide all instruments, equipment, materials and recording devices necessary for tests and
adjustments.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Perform initial test and balance immediately after equipment has been started up and before
building is occupied.
B.
Re-balance the systems based on space temperatures, under actual occupied conditions, to
provide CONSTANT even temperatures in each area. Adjust the control settings to achieve
comfort in the spaces, and prevent one unit from "fighting" the other units.
C.
Installation shall not be considered complete until final reports by agency have been
submitted and approved by the Consulting Engineer.
D.
Send qualified personnel to the building for not less than one period during summer and one
period during winter, observe temperatures throughout the conditioned spaces, consult with
the Owner's representatives as to need for re-adjustment or re-balancing, and perform all
such work indicated by such consultation. Schedule these visits, at a time agreeable to the
Architect and Owner, on or about June 15 and December 1. Make such additional visits to
the building as are required for adjustments and balancing.
E.
Test and adjust supply and exhaust fan RPM to design requirements within the limits of
mechanical equipment provided. Record system on both economizer and normal operation.
TEST, ADJUST AND BALANCE
15040-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
F.
3.2
3.3
3.4
BCB1011
Test and record at each motor: voltage, running amperes, motor nameplate data, and
starter heater ratings.
AIR BALANCE :
A.
Make pitot tube traverse of main supply, exhaust and return ducts; determine CFM at fans
and adjust fans to design CFM.
B.
Test and record system static pressure, at fan suction and discharge.
C.
Test and adjust system for outside, relief, and recirculated air quantity.
D.
Test and record heating apparatus entering and leaving air temperatures, dry bulb.
E.
Test and record cooling apparatus entering and leaving air temperatures, dry bulb and wet
bulb.
F.
Test, balance, adjust and tabulate the air quantities of all supply, return, exhaust and
outside air ducts and air terminal devices within 10% of indicated values.
G.
Adjust flow patterns from air terminal units to minimize drafts as equipment permits.
CAPACITY TESTS:
A.
Conduct capacity test on air conditioning and heating equipment during a period of stable
operation.
Make three trial observation, record readings of:
Entering & leaving temperatures of coils.
B.
Perform capacity tests when outside conditions approximate design conditions for heating
and cooling functions as follows:
Cooling only and summer ventilating system, over 85oF dry bulb.
Heating only system, below 50oF dry bulb.
Year-round system, balance heating and cooling cycles as above.
CONTROL PERFORMANCE CHECK
A.
Check the results produced by the operation of automatic controls; controls requiring
adjustment shall be listed and reported. This does not reduce the responsibility of the
Contractor for the checking and adjustment specified under the Temperature Control
Section.
B.
3.5
Include a verification of control setpoints and proper operation of each control device
as part of the report.
REPORTS:
A.
Reports shall be certified by the testing engineer that the methods used and the results
obtained are as specified herein.
B.
The test and balance contractor shall, as part of it's responsibility, submit written reports of
all mechanical system deficiencies to the Project Manager for action.
TEST, ADJUST AND BALANCE
15040-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
C.
BCB1011
The final records of readings, calculations and adjustments shall be submitted to the
Architect. The final report shall include a single line system schematic diagram indicating
the location of testing points referenced in the report. Provide five (5) copies prior to final
inspection.
END OF SECTION
TEST, ADJUST AND BALANCE
15040-3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 15060 - PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION:
A.
Provide piping for plumbing, heating and air conditioning equipment in accordance with the
provisions of this section of the specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING SYSTEM CLASSIFICATION:
A.
Piping systems are classified as follows with materials and methods of construction:
1. Class 1:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Systems (above ground, 2 inch and smaller size):
* Air conditioning condensate drains
* Domestic cold water
* Domestic hot water
Pipe: Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing, A.S.T.M. Specification B-88.
Construction: suitable for a water pressure of 200 lbs. at 200o F.
Joints: "sweat" type construction using 95-5 solder and a suitable non-corrode
paste soldering system.
Fittings: sweat type wrought copper fittings conforming to ANSI B16.22.
Valves: all brass or bronze solder ends for 125 lbs. steam working pressure.
2.
Class 2:
a.
Systems:
* Plumbing waste, vents, and drains.
b.
Construction: comply with requirements of plumbing and building "Code" for
pressure rating and design.
c.
Pipe Below Grade: Service weight cast iron sanitary pipe with hub using
neoprene gasket fittings conforming to C.I.S.P.I. 301
d.
Pipe Above Grade: Service weight cast iron sanitary pipe with no-hub fittings.
Dry vents above ground may be schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.
e.
Fittings: No hub system. Urinal connections shall be iron pipe size brasspipe
and cast brass screwed fittings.
f.
Option: Type 1, schedule 40 PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D-1785 may be
used for waste and vent piping not located in air plenum areas, if approved by
local code inspectors. Fittings shall be PVC drainage type conforming to ANSI
119.1
3.
Class 3:
a.
System: Refrigerant Piping.
b.
Construction: Suitable for working pressure of 300 psig.
c.
Pipe: Type "K" hard drawn copper tubing, ASTM B-88 bearing "ACR"
identification. Joints assembled with 45% silver alloy solder and a petroleum
based flux.
d.
Fittings: Wrought copper sweat conforming to ANSI B16.22.
e.
Valves: 1-1/8" and smaller packless type as manufactured by Kerotest. Larger
than 1-1/8" shall be Seal Cap type as manufactured by Henry.
f.
Accessories: Expansion valves as manufactured by Alco, Detroit, or Sporlan.
Double port sight glass, filter drier, and moisture indicator shall be installed in
PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
15060-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
g.
2.2
A.
3.
Sleeves for pipes passing through walls, floors, concrete slabs, etc.,:
Schedule 40 steel pipe.
Proper diameter to allow pipes to pass through easily, with not less than 1/4 inch
space between pipe on bare lines and insulation on insulated lines and sleeves.
Full thickness of wall or slab.
Sleeves for exposed piping in floors and/or slabs shall extend a mini mum of three (3) inches
above finished floors. Do not cut or sleeve beams, footings or structural members without prior
written approval of the Architect.
C.
2.3
liquid line ahead of solenoid valve.
Option: Precharged, insulated refrigerant line sets may be used for systems
under 60 MBH total capacity if suitable actual installation, including rise and
run.
PIPE SLEEVES, FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES:
1.
2.
B.
BCB1011
Provide chromium plated escutcheons for exposed piping in finished areas passing through
walls, floors, and ceilings. Escutcheon plates shall be not less than #20 gauge steel and
shall be held in place with springs. Plates shall be sized to cover sleeve and fit over
insulation.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A.
Pipe hangers and accessories: Elcen, Fee & Mason, Grinnell, or Carpenter and Paterson,
Inc.,
A.
Hangers shall be the adjustable type.
B.
Hangers for insulated lines shall be of sufficient size for pipe covering
protection saddles and/or metal protecting bands to fit outside insulation.
B.
Provide any special type of equipment supports required for supporting, guiding, or
anchoring piping and equipment. Details of such supports shall be approved. Supports from
bar joists shall be panel points, or joist shall have supplemental reinforcing as required.
C.
Provide any intermediate supporting steel necessary for properly supporting, guiding, or
anchoring the complete piping systems or equipment. Supplemental steel must be provided
where required.
D.
Supplemental steel: "Structural Grade" in accordance with the standard specifications of the
American Society for Testing materials for "Steel for Buildings and Bridges", Serial
Designation A36-1970T and factory primed.
E.
Except where used for anchor purposes or supports for vertical pipes, and pipe clamp type,
hanger shall be free fit on the pipe and spacers shall be used to prevent binding.
F.
Beam clamps: Grinnell Fig #131.
G.
Hangers for horizontal piping:
1.
Cast Iron Piping: Grinnell Fig. 260
2.
Copper Piping: Grinnell Fig. CT-99c (plastic coated)
H.
Inserts installed after concrete is poured or existing concrete: Rawl "Saber-Tooth," or Phillips
"Red Head," self drilling shells.
I.
Insulation protection shields for pipes supported on clevis hangers: Grinnell Fig. 167; wrap
PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
15060-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
shields 180 O around pipe.
2.4
VALVES AND ACCESSORIES:
A.
All components on PRVs, control valve assemblies, etc., shall be full line size.
B.
Valves on plumbing, heating hot water and chilled water systems shall be quarter turn ball or
butterfly valves.
C.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.
All gate, globe and check valves, valves of a given type: the same domestic
manufacture, except as otherwise specified.
2.
Grooved joint valves: the same manufacturer as the adjoining couplings.
3.
Packing and gaskets: asbestos-free.
4.
Brass alloys used in valves: maximum 15% zinc.
D.
BALL VALVES 2" and under
1.
Two piece cast bronze body, threaded or solder
2.
TFE seat rated for chilled and hot water service
3.
Full port, blowout proof stem
4.
Separate packnut with adjustable stem packing
5.
Solid stainless or chromed ball
6.
2" extended handles of non-thermal conductive material, handle with memory stop
rated for 600 psi non shock WOG
7.
Per Federal Specification MSS-SP110.
8.
Apollo, Hammond, Nibco or Watts.
E.
RELIEF VALVES for water systems:
1.
Full size minimum, ASME rated for 250 psi and stamped.
2.
2" and under : all bronze construction.
3.
Kunkle, Spirax Sarco or Watts.
F.
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES :
1.
125 Ib class all bronze type with integral strainer.
2.
Valve capacity : not less than 15 GPM at 20 psi differential pressure.
3.
Water valves: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Taco, Thrush, or Watts.
4.
Steam valves : Armstrong, Spence or Spirax Sarco.
G.
Air relief valves: manual type. Hoffman, Sarco, Fisher.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
Arrange piping for expansion and contraction. Install piping so as to preserve access to
valves, air vents, and other equipment and to maintain the maximum headroom possible.
C.
Arrange piping to avoid “bullhead” tees; converging flow streams are not to merge at 180O
from each other.
C.
Connections to equipment: as shown in details on the drawings or as recommended by the
manufacturer.
PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
15060-3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.3
3.4
3.5
BCB1011
D.
Install exposed piping so that when covering is applied it will not come in contact with
adjacent surfaces. Group exposed pipe lines together as neatly as possible.
E.
Use reducing fittings in making reductions in pipe sizes.
F.
Ream steel and copper piping after cutting.
G.
Grade water piping for drainage and to prevent air binding.
H.
Unless otherwise indicated, conceal risers in walls, partitions, or in pipe chases, and conceal
horizontal interior mains above ceilings except in mechanical equipment rooms.
SLEEVES:
A.
Provide sleeves where pipes pass through walls, floors, and roofs.
B.
Seal space between sleeve and pipe or insulation air and watertight. For pipes through slab
on grade and foundation walls pack space between pipe and sleeve with alum and seal with
sealant. Pack sleeves through floors and fire walls with fire resistant material to prevent fire
spread.
C.
Should it be necessary to drill holes through concrete slabs, such drilling shall be performed
with core drills. The use of star drills will not be permitted.
D.
Sleeves will not be required where cast iron soil stacks pass through floor slabs on grade.
FIRE STOPPING
A.
Pack sleeves through floors and fire walls with fire resistant material to prevent fire spread.
Fire retardant sealant shall be asbestos free, UL classified, and shall meet ASTM E8141983. Forming and backing material installed with the sealant shall be bulk ceramic fiber or
rigid fiberboard rated for 23000F. Manufacturers: 3M CP-25, Dow Corning or GE Silicone
Foam, Hilti Firestop, Nelson Flameseal, Rectorseal Metacaulk, or Thomas & Betts FlameSafe.
B.
Plastic or insulated piping shall be fire stopped using an intumescent fire stopping system
designed to expand under heat and seal the penetration. Dow Corning # 2002, 3M # FS195/RC-1.
C.
All fire stopping materials shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and the listing requirements.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A.
Support:
Horizontal runs of copper tubing: on not exceeding 6 foot centers for pipe size 3/4 inch
and less, 8 foot centers for pipe sizes 1 inch and larger.
2.
Horizontal runs of cast iron soil pipe: on not exceeding 5 foot centers with hanger
placed behind soil pipe hub or at joint.
B.
A hanger shall be installed not over one foot from each change in direction of piping. Pipe
hangers or supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves.
C.
Vertical piping shall be guided or supported in the center of each riser but not over 10 feet on
1.
PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
15060-4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
centers and shall be supported at the base of the riser on a base elbow or tee with pipe
stand. For uninsulated copper pipe or tubing, the riser clamp shall be copper or copper
plated.
3.6
3.7
3.8
D.
Provide pipe covering protectors where hangers or supports are installed on exterior of pipe
insulation.
E.
Waterproofing shall not be pierced by support bolts.
F.
Split ring and EZ-Grip hangers for Plumbing pipes shall be installed on interior of the pipe
insulation. All other type hangers shall be sized and installed to bear on the outside of
insulation.
SOIL, WASTE, and VENT PIPING:
A.
Install horizontal drain and waste pipes with a minimum fall of 1/4th inch per foot unless
otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer/Architect. Where invert elevations of
drainage lines are indicated on the Drawings, grade lines uniformly between invert
elevations.
B.
Make changes in pipe size on soil, waste, vent, and drain piping with reducing fittings or
recessed reducers unless otherwise required by the applicable plumbing code. Bushings
shall not be used.
C.
Make changes in horizontal direction of soil, waste, vent, and drain pipes with long radius
fittings, or with Y-branches and 1/8th or 1/16th bends, or a combination of both. Provide
special fittings where required.
CONDENSATE DRAINS:
A.
Condensate drain piping shall be full size of equipment connection. Pitch piping a minimum
of 1/8" per foot towards discharge.
B.
Route condensate drains to the nearest floor drain, other indirect waste, or to gravel-filled
"dry" well; as approved by local code officials.
C.
For systems connecting multiple units, provide tee with 6" extension at each connection and
at beginning of line to permit free flow without air binding.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A.
Horizontal runs of pipe shall be supported on centers as follows:
PIPE SIZE
2" and smaller
2-1/2" through 4"
5" and larger
B.
SPACING OF HANGERS
8'
10'
15'
Horizontal runs of plastic piping shall be supported in accordance with the following schedule
(read feet on center):
140oF
Temperature
80oF
Pipe Size
1" and smaller
4-1/2'
2-1/2'
1-1/4" to 3"
6'
3'
PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
15060-5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
4" and larger
C.
8'
BCB1011
4'
Pipe anchors shall be installed. Anchors shall be of a type that will produce the desired
results without imposing excessive strains on the building structure. Details of proposed
anchors shall be submitted for review.
3.10 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES:
A.
Locate valves in accessible places. Provide access panels where indicted, and where
required to obtain access to concealed valves.
B.
Provide full size stops or shut-off valve for each supply and return connection for equipment
not furnished with integral stops.
C.
Valves installed in the horizontal position shall have stems above the centerline of the pipe.
D.
Provide isolation of each independent item of equipment and fixture.
3.11 FREEZE PROTECTION
A.
Water piping subject to freezing due to exposure and system operation shall be protected by
wrapping with heat tape and covering with insulation.
B.
Heat tape shall be UL listed, self regulating type, capable of maintaining a minimum water
temperature of 40oF at an ambient temperature of 0oF. Heat tape shall operate on 120 Vac.
Raychem XL-Trace or Chromalox RTSR.
C.
Insulation shall be minimum 1" Fiberglass as specified in Section 15180.
3.12 REFRIGERANT PIPING:
A.
Test refrigerant piping and fittings after installation at a pressure of 500 psi. Joints shall be
bubble tested with soap lather and halide torch. The system shall then be pump ed out and
the entire circuit placed under 30" vacuum and allowed to stand isolated for a period of 8
hours without noticeable loss of vacuum. Vacuum shall be broken with refrigerant charge.
B.
Add refrigerant in the proper amount and adjust system superheat to proper level.
C.
Refrigerant piping for Variable Refrigerant Flow systems shall be done in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions. All work on this type of system must be done by installers
certified by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
15060-6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 15180- INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
1.2
1.3
A.
Provide insulation for equipment, piping and ductwork furnished under this division.
B.
Piping not to be insulated:
1.
Chromium plated brass connections to plumbing fixtures.
2.
Underground domestic cold water piping.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Products of the manufacturers listed under PRODUCTS will be acceptable for use for the
specific functions noted. Adhesives, sealers, vapor barriers and coatings shall be
compatible with the materials to which they are applied, and shall not corrode, soften or
otherwise attack such material in either the wet or dry state.
B.
Material shall be applied subject to their temperature limits. Application of insulating
materials or finishes shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations
unless otherwise specified herein.
C.
Insulation shall be applied by experienced workers regularly employed for this type of work.
RATING:
A.
Insulation and accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tape and jackets, unless
specifically excepted, shall have a flame-spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke
developed rating of not more than 50. Materials which are field applied may be tested
individually.
B.
Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Ratings shall be determined by Method of Test of
Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, NFPA No. 255, ASTM E-84, UL 723.
C.
Products or their shipping cartons shall bear a label indicating the flame and smoke rating do
not exceed above requirements.
D.
Treatment of jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke safety shall be permanent. Watersoluble, fugitive, or corrosive treatments shall not be used to meet RATINGS criteria.
E.
Certify in writing prior to installation, that products to be used will meet RATING criteria.
F.
The perm rating for vapor barriers shall be not more than 0.05 perms and the rating for
adhesives, coatings and mastics shall be not more than 0.25 perms.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION:
A.
Insulate:
1.
Domestic cold water, hot water and hot water circulating lines.
2.
Above ground horizontal waste piping receiving waste from electric water coolers,
from drinking fountain tailpiece outlet to connection at waste stack.
INSULATION
15180-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.
B.
C.
D.
Condensate drain piping.
Insulation: one piece fibrous glass sectional pipe insulation with factory applied glass
reinforced aluminum foil and white kraft paper flame retardant vapor barrier jacket, wi th selfsealing longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips; average thermal conductivity not to exceed
0.23 BTU-in./ft. 2 - oF. - hour at a mean temperature of 75oF.
Insulation:
Johns-Manville
Micro-Lok AP-T
Owens Corning
Fiberglass 25 ASJ/SSL
Knauf
Insulating cement:
Johns-Manville
48 Insulations
Rockwood Mfg. Co.
No. 301
Quik-Set
Delta-Maid One Shot
E.
Vapor barrier coating:
Benjamin Foster
Tite Fit 30-35
Vimasco
740
Insul-Coustic
F.R.V.B. IC-501
Childers Cil-Perm CP-30
F.
Breather coating:
Benjamin
Sealfas 30-36
Insul-Coustic
Permsure IC-102
Vimasco
713
Childers Chil-Seal CP-50
F.
Fiberglass Pipe insulation thickness shall be as follows:
INSULATION THICKNESS
SERVICE
PIPE SIZE
BELOW 2"
Dom. Cold Water
Condensate Drains
2.2
2"-4"
1"
1"
PREMOLDED LAVATORY INSULATION:
A.
B.
2.3
BCB1011
Exposed waste and water piping under lavatories for use by handicapped persons: molded
flexible vinyl insulation, finished in light gray. Fasten insulation with nylon fasteners.
Truebro Handi Lav-Guard, Brocar Products, ProWrap by McGuire Mfr..
FIBERGLASS BLANKET INSULATION FOR DUCTWORK:
A.
Systems: Supply, outside air ductwork.
B.
Blanket type insulation:
1.
"K" Value, average thermal conductivity, not to exceed 0.27 BTU-in./ft. 2 - oF. - hour at
a mean temperature of 75oF
INSULATION
15180-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
3.
C.
Minimum density of .75 lb/cu. ft.
2" thick.
Insulation:
Johns-Manville
Owens Corning
Certainteed
Fire retardant adhesive for securing insulation to ductwork and for sealing 2" facing flange at
circumferential joints:
Benjamin Foster 85-20
Childers CP-82
Insul-Coustic IC-225
Eplux Cadalar 400
Vimasco 733
D.
Three inch wide foil reinforced kraft tape:
Nashua FSK
FIBERGLASS LINER FOR DUCTWORK:
A.
Systems:
1.
Return air ducts.
2.
Supply ductwork exposed in the space, or in mechanical room.
3.
Supply ductwork for the first 10 ft. from the air handling unit, or through the second
elbow, counting the one which turns the duct horizontally from he air handling unit.
B.
Duct liner: fibrous glass type meeting ASTM C 1071, with one side coated with a fire
retardant, anti-microbial compound.
1.
"K" Value, average thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.20 BTU-in. per sq. ft. per
degree F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75oF,
2.
Noise Reduction Coefficient: .70 or higher based on "Type A" mounting, tested per
ASTM C 423.
2.
Minimum density of 1-1/2 lb/cu. ft.
3.
1-1/2" thick.
C.
Duct liner:
Johns-Manville
Owens-Corning
Certainteed
D.
2.5
Microlite FSK faced wrap, 0.75 lb. density
Fiberglass Faced Duct Wrap FRK 25, Series ED-100
Ultralite Duct Wrap Type IV
D.
Arno C-430
Fason 0822
2.4
BCB1011
Fire retardant adhesives:
Benjamin Foster 85-20
Insul-Coustic IC-225
Vimasco 733
Permacote Linacoustic
Aeroflex Type 150
Ultralite # 150
Childers CP-82
Epolux Cadoprene 400
FOAMED PLASTIC INSULATION:
A.
Insulate:
1.
Refrigerant piping.
B.
Insulation: Armstrong Armaflex AP
C.
Adhesive: Armstrong 520.
INSULATION
15180-3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
GENERAL APPLICATION:
A.
Complete piping and equipment tests required by other sections before insulation is applied.
The ducts must be sealed and leak tested before application of the insulation. The contractor
and the insulator shall inspect ducts to verify that the ducts are properly sealed prior to
insulating and shall review duct leakage test reports provided by the tab agency where duct
leakage testing is specified.
B.
Apply insulation and sundries as recommended by the manufacturer. Install insulation with
smooth and even surfaces, without bulges, protrusions, raw edges, or wrinkles. The jackets
shall be drawn tight and secured smoothly at longitudinal and end laps with adhesive.
Observe manufacturer’s recommended temperature limits during application.
C.
Apply insulation on clean, dry surfaces. All insulation shall be continuous through wall and
ceiling openings and sleeves, except duct insulation shall terminate at fire dampers and
flexible connections. Apply insulation on cold surfaces, where vapor barrier jackets are
used, with continuous unbroken vapor barrier sealed to prevent condensation.
D.
Seal ends of fiberglass pipe insulation with white vapor barrier coating at valves, flanges and
fittings and on straight runs of piping not to exceed 21 ft.
E.
Do not insulate unions.
F.
Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit.
G.
Twist bonding wire terminals turned down into the insulation.
H.
Staples will not be permitted in insulation nor on covering.
I.
Construct insulation on equipment that must be opened periodically for inspection, cleaning
or repair so that insulation can be removed and replaced without damage.
J.
All insulation joints shall be firmly butted and sealed. Adhere insulation to ducts with 100%
coverage of fire retardant manufacturer approved adhesive; additionally, for ducts over 24
inches wide, impale insulation on the bottom of the ducts on metal pins, on maximum 12
inch centers, welded to the duct and secure with speed washers. Minimum compression is to
be used to assure firm fit and still maintain thermal performance.
K.
Vapor retarders should overlap a minimum of 2" (51 mm) at all seams and be sealed with
appropriate pressure-sensitive tape and mastic. When applying pressure-sensitive tapes, the
tape must be firmly rubbed with a proper sealing tool to make sure the closure is secure.
Follow tape manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
L.
Fasteners shall be located a maximum of 3" (76 mm) from each edge and spaced no greater
than 12" (305 mm) on center.
SHIELDS:
A.
3.3
Pipe covering protection shields shall be provided around exterior of pipe insulation at pipe
hangers which fit around pipe insulation.
INSERTS:
INSULATION
15180-4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
A.
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
BCB1011
Provide Inserts for fiberglass pipe insulation with a thickness greater than 2"; install at pipe
hangers where pipe hangers are specified to be sized to fit around pipe and insulation.
Inserts between the pipe and the pipe hangers and shields shall consist of 360 degree
segments of foamglass insulation 24 inches long.
APPLICATION OF FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION:
A.
Butt joints of pipe insulation together and secure jacket laps with lap adhesive. Seal butt
joints with joint straps furnished with insulation.
B.
Insulate fittings, couplings, hubs, strainers and valve bodies in plumbing pipe with
premoulded fitting insulation or with flexible glass fiber with one piece fitting cover.
C.
Fittings, valves and flanges for pipe sizes smaller than 4" shall be insulated with fiberglass
blanket insulation, wrapped under compression (minimum 2:1) to thickness equal to
adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation with 20 gauge galvanized steel wire and apply a
smoothing coat of insulating cement.
D.
Fittings, valves and flanges for pipe sizes 4" and larger shall be insulated with field
fabricated multiple mitered segments of molded fiberglass insulation of the same thickness
as adjoining pipe insulation. Secure fitting insulation segments with 20 gauge galvanized
steel wire and apply a smoothing coat of insulating cement.
APPLICATION OF FIBERGLASS BLANKET DUCT INSULATION:
A.
Wrap insulation around ducts with circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints
overlapped a minimum of 2 inches. Adhere insulation to ducts with 4" strips at 8" on center
of fire retardant adhesive; additionally, for ducts over 24 inches wide, impale insulation on
the bottom of the ducts on metal pins, on maximum 18 inch centers, welded to the duct and
secure with speed washers. On circumferential joints, seal the 2" flange on the insulation
facing with fire retardant adhesive and tape with 3" foil reinforced kraft tape; tape
terminations of insulation at fire dampers, flexible connections and ends of ducts to the duct
with 3" wide foil reinforced kraft tape. Seal penetrations and punctures in insulation facing
with foil reinforced kraft tape and fire retardant vapor barrier coating.
B.
Mark insulation in such a manner to allow easy inspection after installation.
C.
Apply insulation to standing seams and other projections in ductwork or casings so that at
least 1/4" of insulation covers such projections.
APPLICATION OF FIBERGLASS DUCT LINER:
A.
Cut duct liner to provide overlapped and compressed longitudinal corner joints. Install liner
with black coated surface facing the air stream. Adhere duct liner to the ductwork interior
with a 100% coverage of the sheet metal surfaces using a fire retardant adhesive; adhesive
shall be applied by spraying. Coat all exposed leading edges and all transverse joints with
fire retardant adhesive. In addition, secure liner using metal pins welded to the duct and
speed washers. Spacing of metal pin shall be in accordance with SMACNA Manual for "Duct
Liner Applications Standard," Second Edition, 1975.
B.
Protect exposed edges of the lining by 24 gauge galvanized "Z" shapes installed at the edge
of the lining, extending over flat side of lining 1/2 from edge.
APPLICATION OF FOAMED PLASTIC INSULATION:
INSULATION
15180-5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.8
BCB1011
A.
Slip insulation on before pipe joints are made up, hold back from hot joints and cement all
joints with contact adhesive.
B.
Fittings, flanges, unions, stainers, anchors, valves etc. shall be insulated with mitered pieces
of foamed plastic same thickness as the adjacent pipe. Secure with adhesive.
C.
Finish exposed piping with two coats of white vinyl coating.
WEATHERPROOFING:
A.
Protect insulation exposed to weather outside the building with .010" thick corrugated
aluminum covers. Locate longitudinal joints to shed water and secure with 3 aluminum
bands per section. Cover fittings with a layer of glass fabric embedded between two 1/16"
coats of breathing mastic, overlapping adjacent aluminum a minimum of 2".
B.
Insulation covers shall be used on all exterior insulation, including refrigerant piping.
END OF SECTION
INSULATION
15180-6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION:
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Include all necessary apparatus, excavating, controls, valves, and fittings required for a
complete sanitary plumbing system.
UTILITIES AND SERVICES:
A.
Sanitary: Provide sanitary drainage, connect to building sanitary.
B.
Water: Provide domestic (City) water, connecting to building water mains.
TESTS:
A.
Test the plumbing system as required by the applicable plumbing code.
B.
Test water piping for a continuous period of not less than four hours at a hydrostatic
pressure of not less than one hundred twenty-five (125) pounds and make free from leaks.
Completely remake leaky joints with piping dry. Retest system after leaks are corrected.
C.
Plug all necessary openings in the drainage and vent piping systems fill the entire system
with water to the level of the highest vent stack above the roof. The system shall hold this
water for 30 minutes without showing a drop in water level greater than 4 inches. Subject to
approval of the Architect the drainage system may be tested in sections.
STERILIZATION:
A.
Disinfect the potable water system in accordance with the Plumbing Code. After disinfection,
send water samples to the Local Health Department for testing. Obtain approval of the Local
Health Department before the system is placed into service.
B.
Unless the Local Health Department requires otherwise, disinfect potable water piping upon
completion of installation by a mixture containing not less than 0.6 pound of high test calcium
hypochlorite, or 2 pounds of chlorinated lime to each 1000 gallons of water to provide not
less than 50 ppm of available chlorine. Inject the mixture into the system and retain for not
less than 24 hours, at which time the chlorine level shall be at 10 ppm or greater. Then drain
the system and flush with potable water until only a normal chlorine residual remains (.2
ppm).
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1
PLUMBING FIXTURES:
A.
Provide plumbing fixtures complete with trim. All fixtures, trimmings and stops shall be Grade
"A" and shall be of one manufacturer. Plumbing fixtures and trim shall be as scheduled on
the plans.
B.
Plumbing fixtures for use by handicapped persons shall be in accordance with the
Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA).
PLUMBING
15400-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
C.
2.2
2.3
Plumbing fixtures shall be low water consumption type: 1.5 gal/flush for water closets, and
1.0 ga;./flush for urinals unless specified otherwise.
D.
Provide chrome plated flexible water supply risers with wheel handle stops for plumbing
fixtures. McGuire.
E.
Manufacturer's:
1.
Fixtures: Toto, American Standard, Eljer or Kohler.
2.
Trim: American Standard, Chicago Faucet, Symmons, Speakman, T&S Brass.
CLEANOUTS:
A.
Cleanouts in cast iron soil pipe lines shall consist of cast iron ferrule and heavy brass
cleanout plug with square head. Where piping is concealed in floors or walls, install
cleanouts with counter-sunk plugs and covers in and near surface of floors or walls.
B.
Cleanouts for floors shall be Josam Manufacturing Company's Series 58000 with inside
caulk outlet coated cast iron internal cleanout with lead seal, brass rim and Nikaloy cover
plate for light traffic secured to plug by countersunk screw for installation flush with finished
floor. For floors with VCT, provide cover plate with depression for inset of VCT. Provide
carpet marker in carpeted areas. Cleanouts in walls, Josam Manufacturing Company's
Series 58710 with stainless steel covers.
C.
Equal manufactured by Zurn Industries, Inc., Wade Manufacturing Company, or J.R. Smith.
VACUUM BREAKERS AND CHECK VALVES:
A.
2.4
BCB1011
Provide on connections to all hose bibbs, hose outlets, wall hydrants, below the rim water
supplies of all types, plugged or capped outlets, and at all locations specified or shown.
Vacuum breakers shall be Watts Regulator Company Model No. 288A or Sloan Valve
Company Series V with bronze body chrome-plated in finished areas, Wade.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS:
A.
Water hammer arrestors shall be selected and sized in strict accordance with Standard
P.D.I. - WH201.
B.
Arrestors shall be Josam 75000 or equal Zurn, Smith, Wade, Precision Plumbing Products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
GENERAL:
A.
Make connections to all fixtures, traps and similar items. Place into operation all equipment.
B.
Refer to architectural drawings for the exact location of fixtures and drains. Determine
roughing dimensions from the manufacturer of the equipment furnished on the job.
PLUMBING FIXTURES:
A.
Grout between plumbing fixtures and walls and/or floors.
B.
Connection of fixture traps from lavatories, drinking fountains, service sinks, etc. to cast iron
PLUMBING
15400-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
shall be made with D.W.V. type copper.
3.3
3.4
CLEANOUTS:
A.
Provide cleanouts where required by the applicable plumbing code. Do not locate cleanouts in finished floor areas without specific approval by the Architect.
B.
Cleanouts shall be the same size as pipe line in line sizes 4 inches and smaller. Pipe lines
larger than 4 inches shall have 4 inch cleanouts.
C.
Cleanouts installed outside buildings shall be same as in floors and shall be flush with grade
and have minimum 6 inch thick, 12 inch by 12 inch concrete pad poured around Cover.
Cover shall be flush with top of concrete.
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES:
A.
Provide for a pressure test of the water service. Where pressure exceeds 70 PSI, provide a
pressure reducing station. Pressure reducing station shall include a pressure reducing valve,
by-pass with globe valve, pressure gauges and isolation valves at entering and leaving
sides.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING
15400-3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 15650 - HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS:
A.
1.
Capable of delivering air quantity at static pressures noted on drawings within the
limits of the motor provided without use of the motor's service factor. Note that external static
pressure is defined as the static pressure external to the equipment referenced with clean
filters in place and a wet cooling coil if applicable.
Tested and rated in accordance with the Air Moving and Conditioning Association,
Inc., Standard No. 210-74, Test code for Air Moving Devices.
2.
B.
V-Belt drives:
Designed for not less than 150% of connected driving capacity.
Motor sheaves adjustable to provide not less than 20% speed variation.
Select sheaves to drive the fan at a speed to produce the scheduled capacity
indicated on the drawings when set at the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment.
Provide adjustable bases for motors with V-Belt drives.
Provide guards for belt drives exposed without removing access panels, ductwork, or
housings.
Guards: designed with adequate provision for movement of the motor required to
adjust belt tension. Provide means to permit oiling, use of speed counters and other
maintenance and testing operations with the guard in place.
C.
Fan motor enclosures: open drip proof type unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D.
Roof Fans: waterproof design so that water cannot enter the building through the fan
housing, whether or not the fan is operating.
E.
Centrifugal fan wheels: statically and dynamically balanced.
F.
Safety disconnect switches: conform to the requirements of Division 16 - ELECTRICAL.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
Fans:
AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Air conditioning equipment: rated in accordance with American Refrigeration Institute
Standards. Electrical equipment: U.L. listed.
B.
Cooling capacities: not less than that scheduled on drawings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HVAC
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMP SYSTEM:
A.
Variable Capacity, Heat Pump Heat Recovery Air Conditioning System; Mitsubishi Electric
City Multi VRFZ (Variable Refrigerant Flow Zoning), R2-series (Simultaneous Cooling and
Heating); Sanyo, Fujitsu
B.
System shall consist of a outdoor unit, BC (branch circuit) controller, multiple indoor units.
Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be capable of operating in any mode
independently of other indoor units or groups. System shall be capable of changing mode
(cooling to heating, heating to cooling) with no interruption to system operation. Each indoor
unit or group of indoor units shall be independently controlled. The sum of connected
15650-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
C.
capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of outdoor rated capacity.
Warranty: the units shall be covered by the manufacturer’s extended manufacturer’s limited
warranty for a period of five (5) years from date of installation.
D.
The system shall be installed by a contractor with extensive install and service training of this
type of system. The mandatory contractor service and install training should be performed
by the manufacturer.
E.
Outdoor unit : equipped with circuit boards that interface to the control system. Each
outdoor unit module shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired and run tested
at the factory.
1.
sound rating no higher than 60 db(a) individually or 64 db(a) twinned.
2.
Refrigerant lines: insulated.
3.
An accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls.
4.
A high pressure safety switch, over-current protection, crankcase heater and dc bus
protection.
5.
The ability to operate with a maximum height difference of 164 feet and have total
refrigerant tubing length of 1804-2625 feet. The greatest length is not to exceed 541
feet between outdoor unit and the indoor units without the need for line size changes
or traps.
6.
Capable of operating down to -4 degree f ambient.
7.
A high efficiency oil separator plus additional logic controls to ensure adequate oil
volume in the compressor is maintained.
8.
Unit must defrost all circuits simultaneously
G.
Unit cabinet:
1.
Fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished. Units cabinets shall be able
to withstand 960 hours per astm b117 criteria for seacoast protected models
Fan:
1.
Drive, variable speed propeller type fan
2.
Inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, completely variable speed.
3.
Mounted for quiet operation.
4.
Provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.
5.
Have vertical discharge airflow.
H
HVAC
BCB1011
I.
Refrigerant: R-410A.
J.
Coil:
1.
Nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing.
2.
Factory applied corrosion resistant blue-fin finish.
3.
Protected with an integral metal guard.
K.
Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit controlled by means of an inverter driven compressor.
M.
Compressor:
1.
Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with one inverter driven scroll hermetic
compressor.
2.
Crankcase heater(s)
3.
Inverter to modulate capacity.
4.
Equipped with an internal thermal overload.
5.
Mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
N.
Branch circuit (BC) controllers
1.
Bc equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the control system and shall
perform all functions necessary for operation. Bc controller: completely factory
15650-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
assembled, piped and wired; run tested at the factory.
2.2
O.
Refrigerant valves:
1.
Each branch shall have multiple two-position valves to control refrigerant flow.
2.
Service shut-off valves: field-provided/installed for each branch to allow service to any
indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation.
3.
Linear electronic expansion valves: used to control the variable refrigerant flow.
P.
Ceiling-concealed ducted indoor unit
1.
Ceiling-concealed ducted indoor fan coil design that mounts above the ceiling with a
2-position, field adjustable return and a fixed horizontal discharge supply and shall
have a modulating linear expansion device.
2.
Factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory
wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and
fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay
mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be
charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory.
3.
Fan:
a.
Statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently
lubricated bearings.
b.
Consist of three (3) speeds, high, mid, and low plus the auto-fan function
c.
Have a ducted air outlet system and ducted return air system.
4.
Filter:
1.
Return air filtered by means of a standard factory installed return air filter.
5.
coil:
a.
Nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing.
b
pressure tested at the factory.
c.
Condensate pan and drain under the coil.
d.
Both refrigerant lines insulated.
Q.
Controls
1.
General: operate at 24vdc. Controller power and communications shall be via a
common non-polar communications bus.
2.
B. wiring: installed in a system daisy chain configuration from indoor unit to remote
controller to indoor unit, to the bc controller and to the outdoor unit. Control wiring to
remote controllers run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller associated
with that unit.
3.
Control wiring for schedule timers, system controllers, and centralized controllers shall
be installed in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to outdoor unit, to system
controllers, to the power supply.
4.
System controller: capable of being networked with other system controllers for web
based control.
5.
Wiring 2-conductor (16 awg), twisted shielded pair, stranded wire.
6.
Network wiring shall be cat-5e with rj-45 connection.
7.
Remote controller: capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group).
Remote controller shall allow the user to change on/off, mode (cool, heat, auto, dry,
and fan), temperature setting, and fan speed setting. Remote controller shall be able
to limit the set temperature range. Room temperature: sensed at either the controller
or the indoor unit.
SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS
A.
HVAC
Split system heat pumps: factory matched electric furnace with direct expansion cooling coil
and remote mounted condensing unit, and auxiliary electric heating coil. Cooling coil and
condensing unit shall be of same manufacture and shall have a minimum SEER of 10.0, and
15650-3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
Direct expansion cooling coil:
1.
Aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to non-ferrous tubing with all joints brazed.
2.
Factory installed refrigerant metering device.
3.
Equipped with refrigerant line fittings for mechanical or sweat connections.
4.
With connection for condensate removal
5.
Condensate pan painted to prevent corrosion and insulated to prevent dripping.
D.
Condensing unit:
Air cooled complete with refrigerant and oil charge.
With brass service valves with fittings and gauge ports
Compressor: welded hermetic, scroll type with internal vibration isolation. Compressor
shall have 5 year warranty.
Condenser coil: aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to non-ferrous tubing.
Condenser fan: propeller type direct drive arranged for vertical air discharge.
Fan motor: factory lubricated with inherent protection.
Controls: factory wired, including
a.
Thermal and current overload devices for the compressor
b.
Reversing valve
c.
Defrost controls
d.
Suction accumulator
e.
Transformer
f.
Crankcase heater
g.
High and low pressure safety switches
h.
Filter-dryer
i.
Liquid line sight glass.
E.
Accessories:
Timed off control
Low ambient operation.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.
2.
REFRIGERANTS:
A.
2.4
HVAC
Refrigerants used in split systems shall be Classified A1 in accordance with ASHRAE 34.
Refrigerant shall be limited to no more than 5.5 pounds per 1,000 cu. ft. of occupied space,
per table 1103.1 of the IBC Mechanical Code (2003).
CEILING AND INLINE CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FANS:
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
a minimum COP of 3.00 at 470 F when rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210. Unless
otherwise noted on the plans, heat pump air handling units shall single point wiring
connection for both the fan and the electric heaters. Carrier, Trane, Lennox, McQuay.
Electric furnace: blower, cooling coil, and electric heater housed in insulated, painted, steel
cabinet.
1.
Blower: centrifugal type statically and dynamically balanced.
2.
Drive: mutispeed direct drive motor resiliently mounted.
3.
Filters: 1" throwaway type.
4.
Electric heater: factory installed, with primary and secondary high limit protection.
Provide transformer, relay and terminal blocks.
C.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
BCB1011
Fans:
Steel cabinets with fiberglass interior lining
Provided with backdraft damper and disconnect switch
Resiliently mounted centrifugal wheels with direct drive motor.
Acme, Carnes, Cook, Greenheck, Jenn-Aire, ILG or Penn.
15650-4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
Ceiling exhaust fans: grille on fan intake.
C.
Provide roof caps for roof discharge and brick vents for wall discharge.
BCB1011
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
GENERAL
A.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
B.
Operate equipment after installation and prior to occupancy of building. Correct deficiencies
in operation prior to building occupancy.
C.
Remove all shipping materials and hold down bolts.
D.
Install equipment on roof watertight and provide flashing or counterflashing as required.
E.
Do not operate air handling equipment without filters in place. Install clean set of filters after
construction is complete and building is cleaned.
F.
Arrange equipment for maximum accessibility to portions requiring service and/or
maintenance.
SPLIT SYSTEMS
A.
Mount condensing units on 4" concrete pads. Pads shall extend a minimum of 6" beyond
sides of unit.
B.
Provide 3/8" thick neoprene mounting pads under floor mounted fan coil units.
C.
Provide auxiliary drain pan under the entire unit. Extend condensate drain to nearest floor
drain, or other indirect waste approved by local plumbing code officials.
D.
Size refrigerant piping as recommended by the manufacturer for the actual routing, rise, and
application. Route refrigerant piping concealed above ceilings and in walls. Refrigerant
piping shall have no joints in the occupied space; refrigerant piping shall be done to maintain
a Low Probability, as defined in IBC Mechanical Code, 1103.3 (2003), that refrigerant
leaking from a failed connection, seal, or component could enter the space.
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMP SYSTEM:
A.
Systems shall be installed by installers certified by the manufacturer of the system.
B.
Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and requireents.
END OF SECTION
HVAC
15650-5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 15800 - DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
DUCTWORK:
A.
SMACNA Standards referred to hereinafter shall mean standards published by the Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc.
B.
Except where indicated otherwise, duct construction and installation shall conform to the
recommendations of the SMACNA manual for Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards,
5th Edition, 1976. Ductwork shall be constructed and sealed as required for a 2" static
pressure rating, Seal Class "B", in the previously referenced standard.
C.
Ductwork as indicated is diagrammatic only and does not show all necessary offsets,
hangers, and accessories. All such items required for a completed system shall be
furnished by the Contractor.
D.
Sizes shown for lined ductwork are clear inside dimensions and sheetmetal dimensions shall
be increased to allow for thickness of lining.
AIR DISTRIBUTION:
A.
Select products to provide full coverage of areas served without objectionable noise or draft.
Products shall be selected for noise levels not in excess of NC-35. Air distribution products
shall be tested and rated in an Air Diffusion Council Certified Laboratory. Unless indicated
otherwise, all air distribution products shall be furnished by one manufacturer, who shall
catalog a full line of both steel and aluminum air distribution devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DUCTWORK:
A.
Ductwork: constructed of galvanized steel sheets.
Exposed sheetmetal: "paint grip" type galvanized steel.
Angles, rivets, nuts and bolts: of the same material as the duct in which installed.
B.
Longitudinal seams at corners of rectangular ducts: Pittsburgh type or button punch snap
lock with locks preferably on the tops and bottoms of ducts, not on the sides.
C.
Cross-break duct panels for rectangular ducts over eighteen (18) inches in either height or
width, except:
1.
Where grilles, diffusers or access doors are to be installed, unless the distance from
the edge of the grille, diffuser or access door to the edge of the panel exceeds
eighteen (18) inches. The area to which the grille, diffuser or access door is attached
shall be left flat.
2.
Ducts which are finished with rigid insulation.
D.
Elbows: square type with turning vanes. Where elbows have a different size inlet and outlet,
turning vanes shall be single thickness type with extensions on the leaving side. Turning
vanes shall be installed with vanes parallel to the elbow.
E.
Tee connections on branch ducts shall be the radius tap-in type. Branch take-offs from trunk
ducts shall be similar to SMACNA Plate 2-5, except that adjustable splitter damper shall be
provided at these points or SMACNA Plate 26, Fig. B with adjustable vanes.
DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.2
HANGERS & SUPPORTS
A.
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
BCB1011
Hangers and supports for ductwork: in accordance with SMACNA standards.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
A.
In rectangular ducts:
1.
Weatherproof minimum 20 oz.
2.
Not less than six (6) inches long, with suitable metal collar frame at each end with
allowance of at least two (2) inch slack in fabric to eliminate vibration transmission.
3.
Ventglas as manufactured by Vent Fabrics, Inc., Eigin Mfg., or Duro Dyne Corp
B.
Flexible connections exposed to the weather: water-tight, constructed of at least two layers
of fabric.
C.
Provide flexible connections to ductwork at the air handling units and fan-coil units.
DUCT CLOSURE COLLARS:
A.
Provide:
1.
Where ducts pass through masonry walls and partitions which extend full height to the
underside of the structure
2.
On both sides of walls and partitions, except where registers and grilles are installed
B.
Fabricate from 22 gauge galvanized steel sheet.
C.
Install flanges tight against the wall. Pack the space between the duct and the wall wi th
fiberglass blanket insulation.
DUCT AND PLENUM ACCESS DOORS:
A.
DOORS:
1.
Double wall construction of not less than 24 gauge galvanized steel sheet, with 1"
thick neoprene coated fiberglass insulation between the walls.
2.
A continuous hinge on one side and cam latch with striker plate on the other side
3.
Height over 12 inches: not less than 2 cam latches with striker plates.
B.
DOOR FRAME:
1.
Not less than 22 gauge galvanized steel
2.
Knock-over edges for securing to duct.
C.
DOOR ASSEMBLY
1.
Double gasketed to provide seals from the door to the frame and from the frame to
duct.
D.
SIZE:
1.
To allow proper access to intended device
2.
Minimum 12" x 16", except as indicated on the drawings.
FLEXIBLE DUCT:
A.
Insulated, with a flame spread rating not over 25 and a developed smoke rating not over 50.
B.
Not less than 1" thick fiberglass with a vapor barrier jacket.
DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.7
2.8
C.
Inner sleeves: fiberglass or tedlar covered spring steel.
D.
Rated for 6.0 inch static pressure.
E.
Connected with circumferential compression clamps consisting of either screw-driven,
slotted stainless steel bands or ratcheted nylon straps.
F.
Clevaflex, Genflex, Flexmaster, Thermaflex, Wiremold, Atco.
SPIN-IN FITTINGS:
A.
Consist of a round galvanized sheet metal collar with a groove designed to allow the fitting to
screw into a mating hold.
B.
With an extractor and manual balancing damper with a locking quadrant operator.
C.
Mounted with the extractor facing into the airstream. After insulation, a galvanized sheet
metal strap shall be screwed to the duct and the fitting to ensure permanent, proper
positioning of the fitting.
MANUAL DAMPERS AND DAMPER HARDWARE:
A.
Splitter Dampers:
1.
2.
B.
2.9
BCB1011
Constructed of not less than 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet.
The length of the damper blade shall be the same as the width of the widest duct
section at the split, but in no case shall be blade length be less than 12 inches.
Manual Volume Control Dampers:
1.
Single blade butterfly dampers:
a.
Use in ducts up to and including 18"x12" size
b.
Constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel blade mounted in a
galvanized steel frame.
c.
For rectangular dampers, the top and bottom edges of the blade shall be
crimped to stiffen the blade.
d.
Provide an extended rod to permit installation of a damper regulator.
2.
Multi-louver dampers:
a.
Use in ducts larger than 18"x12", in either or both dimensions.
a.
Opposed blade type, constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel
blades mounted in a galvanized steel channel frame. Blade spacing shall not
exceed 6", and the top and bottom edges of the blades shall be crimped to
stiffen the blades. Damper blades shall be interconnected by rods and linkages
to provide simultaneous operation of all blades. Damper shall be provided with
an extended rod to permit installation of a damper regulator.
3.
Dampers for outside air intake or relief:
a.
Edge and jamb seals
b.
Rated at less than 1% leakage when tested at 2" water.
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES:
A.
Diffusers:
1.
Complete with pattern adjustment device, straightening vanes and volume control
DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800-3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
2.
3.
4.
5.
BCB1011
dampers.
Diffuser backplate shall transition smoothly from neck size to full face size.
Straightening vanes and dampers are not required where diffusers are attached to
round flexible ductwork.
Internal parts of diffusers shall be secured so that they can be removed and
assembled without special tools.
Provide manual dampers for all diffusers.
B.
Grilles and registers:
1.
Felt or rubber gaskets cemented to the back face
2.
Holding screws not over 18 inches on centers around the perimeter.
3.
Grilles passing air through partitions: as described for wall return grilles, 1 for each
side partition.
C.
Frame types of diffusers and ceiling return grilles:
1.
Match ceiling type(s) as indicated on architectural drawings.
2.
In lay-in ceilings, size to lay in a nominal 24 inch x 24 inch grid opening.
D.
Registers: The same as grilles, with opposed blade damper.
E.
Finishes:
1.
Factory applied
2.
Steel construction: off white baked enamel.
3.
Aluminum construction, ceiling mounted: off white baked enamel.
4.
Aluminum construction, linear diffusers and bar grilles: exposed surfaces to be clear
anodized aluminum, interiors to be flat black.
5.
Aluminum construction: clear anodized aluminum.
F.
Anemostat, Carnes, Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Nailor, Metalaire.
2.10 FIRE DAMPERS:
A.
Fire Dampers:
1.
Factory fabricated curtain type
2.
Constructed and tested in accordance with UL Safety standard 555.
3.
Rated for 1-1/2 hour unless noted otherwise.
4.
Manufacturer: provide instructions for installation conforming to manner in which
dampers were approved by UL.
B.
Frames:
1.
Connected to ductwork: "B" frame.
2.
In transfer openings in walls shall be "A" frame.
C.
Fusible link rating:
1.
160 degrees F
D.
Ruskin, Dowco, Nailor, Prefco, National Controlled Air
2.11 LOUVERS:
A.
Louvers:
1.
AMCA certified for zero water penetration and maximum 1/8 inch pressure drop at a
free area velocity of 900 fpm.
2.
4" deep
DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800-4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.
Constructed of .125" thick extruded aluminum complete with 3/4" aluminum screen in
removable frame.
B.
Frames:
1.
Box type for masonry construction
2.
Flange type for frame construction.
C.
Finish:
1.
2.
D.
BCB1011
Factory applied baked enamel.
Color selected from standard by Architect; submit samples
Arrow, Ruskin, Greenheck, Louvers and Dampers, Construction Specialties
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
SHEETMETAL WORK - GENERAL
A.
Install access panels on entering side of all turning vanes, fire dampers, control dampers
and other locations where cleaning, oiling, inspection or maintenance are required. Locate
access doors in bottom or side of ducts for ease of access.
B.
Provide supplemental stiffening on ducts and apparatus casings to prevent drumming and to
provide a structurally sound assembly.
C.
Interior of ducts shall be smooth with joints caulked or sealed with duct sealer. The entire air
system shall be rigid, free from rattles and air noises.
D.
Arrange ductwork connections to mechanical equipment to avoid restricting access to panels
which must be removed for servicing or cleaning of unit.
E.
Provide auxiliary frames set flush with the plaster line for outlets in plaster.
F.
Install exposed ductwork in finished areas tight to structure.
G.
Ductwork installed exterior to the building shall have two coats of waterproof mastic applied
to prevent water penetration.
H.
Branch takeoffs to flexible ducts shall be made using spin in fittings. Branch take-offs shall
not be located in the following locations: within 5 ft. downstrem of an elbow, within 3 ft. of
another take-off.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
In accordance with Section V (pages 5-1 through and including page 5-13) HANGERS AND
SUPPORTS of the referenced SMACNA Standard, except:
1.
Hangers shall be spaced not over 8'-0" on centers.
2.
Longest dimensions up through 60":
a.
Galvanized steel strap type
b.
As scheduled in the SMACNA Standard, Table 5-1 (page 5-8).
3.
Longest dimension 61" and larger:
a.
Trapeze type constructed of galvanized steel angles with round hanger rods.
b.
Size as scheduled in the SMACNA Standard, Table 5-1 (page 5-8) for strap
hangers and Table 5-3 (pages 5-10)
DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800-5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
B.
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
BCB1011
Hangers for ducts suspended directly from the structure shall be screwed or "pop" riveted to
the bottom and sides of the duct and secured to the structure by inserts, expansion shield
bolts, beam clamps, welding, or bolting. Drive anchors shall not be installed in any location
which will weaken the existing building. Install supplementary steel as required to bridge
between joists and all supports shall be at joist panel points.
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A.
Install flexible ductwork in a fully extended condition, free of sags and kinks using the
minimum length required to make connection. Maximum length of flexible duct shall be eight
feet.
B.
Support on a maximum of 4' centers with bands of 1" minimum width or wire through
grommets furnished in seam of jacket.
GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS
A.
Secure sidewall grilles and registers to duct with galvanized sheetmetal screws.
B.
Wall return and relief grilles installed above eye level shall have blades positioned so that
inside of duct or the adjacent space will not be visible through the grille.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Install damper in sleeve and install unit in wall using retaining angles. The installation shall
be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation for complying with UL label.
B.
Duct shall be connected to sleeve using slip type joints on top and bottom and a drive slip on
each side so that duct can breakaway leaving damper and sleeve in wall or floor.
C.
After installation prove damper operation by removing link and operating damper.
LOUVERS AND SCREENS
A.
Secure to structure with bolts not over 8" on center.
B.
After installation caulk top, bottom and sides to make installation watertight.
C.
Provide angle frame as required to join connecting ductwork airtight to louver.
FIRE STOPPING
A.
Pack sleeves through floors and fire walls with fire resistant material to prevent fire spread.
Fire retardant sealant shall be asbestos free, UL classified, and shall meet ASTM E8141983. Forming and backing material installed with the sealant shall be bulk ceramic fiber or
rigid fiberboard rated for 23000F. Manufacturers: 3M CP-25 Caulk/ 3M 2001 foam Fire
Barrier, Dow Corning or GE Silicone Foam, Hilti Firestop, Nelson Flameseal, Rectorseal
Metacaulk, or Thompson & Betts Flame-Safe.
B.
Plastic or insulated piping shall be fire stopped using an intumescent fire stopping system
designed to expand under heat and seal the penetration. Dow Corning # 2002, 3M # FS195/RC-1.
C.
All fire stopping materials shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800-6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
recommendations and the listing requirements.
END OF SECTION
DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800-7
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 15900 - AUTOMATIC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
DESCRIPTION:
A.
Provide a complete system of electric or electronic temperature and safety controls for all
mechanical equipment specified or shown on drawings.
B.
Variable Flow Refrigerant systems shall be controlled by the manufacturer’s dedicated
electronic control system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Controls not provided with equipment shall be Barber Coleman, Honeywell, Johnson or
Penn unless otherwise specified.
B.
Controls shall be installed by trained mechanics in the direct employ of the controls
manufacturer or the mechanical contractor.
RELATED WORK:
A.
The installation of motor starters, thermal overload switches, and power wiring for
Mechanical equipment is specified under another division. This division includes mounting
controls and all automatic control interlock and starting circuit wiring.
B.
Refer to SECTION 15650 "HVAC EQUIPMENT" for control devices furnished with
equipment.
SUBMITTALS:
A.
A complete separate wiring diagram for each system shall be submitted to the Architect for
approval. Installation of control system shall not commence until submittal has been
approved. Submittal shall include the following as a minimum:
1.
Data sheets on all devices to be utilized.
2.
Power supply through all starters, motors and switches.
3.
A diagram showing all control wiring and devices with terminal designations, normal
position of dampers and valves, and location of all devices including remote elements.
4.
Complete Bill of Materials.
5.
Detailed typewritten description of the operation of the control system using device
designations as shown on the control diagram.
6.
Internal electrical schematics of all packaged equipment with interface points clearly
marked. Terminal designations alone will not be acceptable.
"As Built" control diagrams shall be displayed as specified in GENERAL PROVISIONS.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:
A.
Coordinate work in occupied areas with the Owner and General Contractor to minimize
inconvenience and provide adequate temperature control during construction period.
B.
Interface with building fire alarm and smoke detection system as provided by Division 16
shall be made under this section as specified hereinafter. Coordinate the work and devices
required to meet the sequences specified.
AUTOMATIC CONTROLS
15900-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS:
A.
2.2
Low voltage control wiring shall be not less than #18 plastic covered, color coded. Line
voltage wiring shall not be smaller than #14 600 volt wire. Wire which is not "plenum rated"
shall be run in conduit with outlet boxes and fittings as specified in Division 16. E.M.T.
conduit may be used. All wiring shall be installed in strict accordance with the latest edition
of NFPA-70, Article 725.
DEVICES:
A.
THERMOSTATS: microprocessor based electronic, with temperature sensing accuracy of
1oF, battery backup to provide continuation of time schedule in event of power failure.
Thermostat shall have the following capabilites:
1.
Display both time and temperature.
2.
7 day time scheduled operation of the HVAC equipment
3.
Automatic time scheduled readjustment of control temperature setpointat least twice a
day on a 7 day schedule
4.
Dead-band setpoint of the heating and cooling temperatures
5.
Automatic operation of fan continuously during occupied periods, and intermittently
during unoccupied periods.
6.
Individual heat and cool setpoints available for Occupied and Not Occupied periods.
7.
P+I+D control to minimize temperature fluctuations.
8.
Recovery ramping control automatically optimizes equipment start times based on
building load.
Provide remote space temperature sensors.
Sensors shall have limited ability to increase or decrease space temperature 3 degrees.
Over-ride program shall operate only until the next program point. Honeywell T7771A.
Remote Sensor shall have a blank faceplate, with no adjust or control by the room
occupants.
Honeywell T7350, White Rogers, equal by HVAC equipment mfr..
B.
FIRESTATS: electric manual reset type, with settings not more than 50oF above the normal
maximum temperature at their location.
C.
SMOKE DETECTORS: manual reset ionization type for duct installation in compliance with
NFPA 90A, complete with sampling tubes, detector head, pilot light and necessary number
of NO/NC contacts for sequences specified. Where a fire alarm system is provided,
coordinate requirements for smoke detectors with fire alarm manufacturer.
D.
Provide other materials as specified hereinafter and all controls accessories necessary for
completely functional system operating according to the specified sequences.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
A.
3.2
Wall mounted thermostats shall be mounted 4'-O" above finished floor at locations indicated.
HEAT & SMOKE CONTROL:
AUTOMATIC CONTROLS
15900-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
3.3
3.4
BCB1011
A.
Air conditioning system with a supply air capacity of 2,000 CFM or less shall have a firestat
located in the return air ductwork ahead of any outside air to stop the unit when the duct air
temperature exceeds 125oF. Provide a smoke detector located in the main return duct to
automatically stop the fan upon detection of products of combustion in the air stream. Smoke
detector shall be as specified in NFPA 72E, or (6) duct widths from the last return air
opening. Where local codes require, locate the smoke detector in the supply air duct, in lieu
of the return air duct.
B.
Where a fire alarm system is provided in the building, activation of the fire alarm system shall
stop all HVAC fans.
C.
Additional controls shall be provided to meet local codes.
SEQUENCES OF OPERATION:
A.
SPLIT SYSTEMS:
1.
System shall start and stop based on owners schedule as programmed in the
thermostat.
2.
Firestat shall stop unit when temperature exceeds setpoint of 125oF.
3.
Where required, Smoke Detector shall stop unit and notify building fire alarm system
upon detection of smoke.
4.
Minimum outside air damper shall be interlocked with unit supply fan except that
damper shall remain closed when return air temperature is below 65oF.
5.
With thermostat in "ON" mode fan shall run continuously. With thermostat in "AUTO"
mode fan shall cycle on and off with heating and cooling controls.
6.
With thermostat in "AUTO" mode heating or cooling shall be provided as required.
7.
With thermostat in "COOL" mode cooling shall cycle on in stages when space
temperature exceeds thermostat setpoint.
8.
With thermostat in "HEAT" mode heat shall cycle on in stages when space
temperature is below thermostat setpoint. For heat pumps the auxiliary heat shall
cycle on only after heat pump fails to maintain room temperature.
B.
EXHAUST FANS
1.
Exhaust fans serving private toilets shall be interlocked with lights in that room.
SYSTEM CHECK-OUT
A.
Check-out each system for control function through entire sequence, check calibration of
instruments, reset instrument control points.
B.
Owner maintenance personnel shall be made thoroughly familiar with the operation and
service of the project automatic temperature control circuits.
END OF SECTION
AUTOMATIC CONTROLS
15900-3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 16010- ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
INTERPRETATION OF SPECIFICATIONS:
A.
General provisions and requirements apply throughout. Cross references or general
provisions may be repeated for convenience or emphasis only.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Interpret the following as indicated:
“or equal”:
“in accordance with the General Conditions”, or “an equivalent with
respect to style and function”.
“approved”: “approved or accepted by Governing Officials or the authorities
having jurisdiction”.
“provide”:
“furnish and install, connect, and test, and contract for the
performance of same.”
“wiring”:
“required conductors or cable and raceway system, including
fittings, boxes, connectors,
supports, hardware,
labeling, and
miscellaneous related
accessories”.
“work”:
“materials completely provided,” which shall include all activities
and services necessary to meet contract requirements, including
inspection and replacement as specified of any defective element”.
“materials”: “equipment and/or materials”.
“:”:
“shall be/have” Specifications following a colon are criteria which
apply to the term preceding the colon.
1.2
SCOPE OF WORK:
A.
Install electrical work covered by the below specifications and approved drawings. Provide
material, labor transportation, tools, supervision, etc., necessary to complete the total electrical job.
Items not specifically mentioned herein which are obviously necessary to make a complete working
installation shall be provided, including any necessary field engineering and/or detail drawings
required. Submit drawings for approval as provided for “Shop Drawings”.
B.
C
C
C
C
C
The work shall consist of, but shall not be limited to, the following systems:
Interior electrical system for lighting, power and secondary service entrance.
Empty conduits for telephone and misc. systems.
Power connections to equipment specified in specifications and approved drawings.
Temporary power as required for the project.
Revisions to fire alarm system.
1.3
CODES AND FEES:
A.
Work shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the locally adopted edition of the
National Electrical Code, NFPA #70 and local and state codes and regulations of utility company
providing service.
B.
Obtain and pay for all permits and inspections required by the building and safety codes, and
ordinances, and the rules and regulations of any legal body having jurisdiction.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
16010-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
C.
BCB1011
Electrical items covered by this specification shall be UL labeled and listed for the purpose.
1.4
DRAWINGS:
A.
The drawings indicate the general arrangement of electrical equipment. Review
architectural drawings for door swings, cabinets, counters and other built-in equipment; conditions
indicated on architectural plans shall govern for this work. Coordinate installation of electrical
equipment with the structural and mechanical equipment and access thereto. Coordinate
installation of recessed electrical equipment with concealed ductwork and piping, and wall
thickness.
B.
Do not scale drawings. Dimensions for layout of equipment shall be obtained from
architectural and/or mechanical unless specifically indicated on electrical drawings.
C.
Discrepancies shown on different drawings, between drawings and specifications or
between documents and field conditions shall be promptly brought to the attention of the Architect.
1.5
SHOP DRAWINGS:
A.
Submit for review by the architect a complete schedule and data of materials and equipment
to be incorporated in the work. Submittals shall be supported by descriptive materials, such as
catalog sheets, product data sheets, diagrams, performance curves, and charts published by the
manufacturer, to show conformance to specification and drawing requirements, model numbers
alone will not be acceptable. Data submitted for review shall contain all information required to
indicate compliance with equipment specified. Complete electrical characteristics shall be provided
for all equipment. Submittals for lighting fixtures shall include photometric data. The architect
reserves the right to require sample of any equipment to be submitted for approval.
B.
Each individual submittal item for materials and equipment shall be marked to show
specification section and paragraph number which pertains to the item.
C.
Prior to submitting shop drawings, review the submittal for compliance with the contract
documents and place a stamp or other confirmation thereon which states that the submittal
complies with contract requirements. Submittals without such verification will be returned without
review.
D.
Product and equipment submittals shall be grouped together in 3 ring binders, with
separators between types of equipment. Each submittal binder shall contain a table of contents
listing the items contained therein by number and name. Do not submit multiple, loose copies.
E.
All submittals shall be made at one time. Submittals will not be reviewed until all of the
submittals listed below have been received. Submittals shall be made for each of the
following items:
Lighting Fixtures
Disconnect Switches
Circuit Breakers
Timers
Motor Starters
Surge Suppressors
F.
Switchboards
Panelboards
Wiring Devices
Fuses
Contactors
Prepare and submit scaled plan drawings and wall elevations of each electrical room
showing all equipment within the room.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
16010-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
G.
BCB1011
Submit detailed drawings indicating lighting integration into EMS system including
connections, components, zoning, etc.
1.6
RECORD DRAWINGS:
A.
1.
2.
3.
At the time of final inspection, provide three (3) sets of complete data on electrical equipment
used in the project and as-built drawings reflecting all field changes. This data shall be in bound
form and shall include the following items:
Test results required by these specifications.
Panelboard shop drawings and circuit directories reflecting all field changes.
Data sheets indicating electrical characteristics of all devices and equipment.
1.7
ELECTRICAL SERVICES:
A.
Electrical service shall be as indicated on the drawings.
1.8
SITE UTILITIES:
A.
Contact the Architect if any discrepancies should appear from the drawings locating the
utilities.
1.9
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A.
Connect equipment requiring electrical connections under this section of these
specifications. Where electrical connections to equipment require specific locations, obtain such
locations from shop drawings. Do not scale drawings for location of conduit stub-ups or boxes
mounted in wall or floor to serve specific equipment, unless dimensioned on approved electrical
drawings.
B.
Electrical circuits to equipment furnished under other sections of these specifications are
based on design loads. If actual equipment furnished has loads other than design loads, electrical
circuits and protective devices shall be revised to be compatible with equipment furnished at no
additional cost to the owner.
C.
Equipment furnished under other divisions of these specifications to be connected under this
section of the specifications shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following:
Electrical equipment for heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems.
1.
D.
Examine other sections of these specifications, where equipment requiring electrical service
is specified. Become fully aware of the scope of the work under this section of these specifications
requiring electrical service and connections to equipment specified elsewhere.
1.10 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS:
A.
Review plumbing and HVAC drawings and Division 15 of these specifications for mechanical
equipment requiring electrical service. Provide service to and make connections to all such
mechanical equipment requiring electrical service.
B.
Examine the nameplate data for equipment actually furnished on the project. If equipment
has loads other than those indicated, control equipment and feeders shall be adjusted in size
accordingly. Such adjustment shall be subject to the approval of the architect.
1.11 COORDINATION:
A.
Coordinate electrical activities with other trades so as to avoid delays, interferences, and any
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
16010-3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
unnecessary work.
1.12 GUARANTEE:
A.
For guarantee of work under Division 16, refer to the general and special conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS:
A.
Materials or equipment specified by manufacturer's name shall be used, unless approval of
other manufacturers is listed in addendum to these specifications. Request for approval of
substitute materials shall be submitted in writing to the architect at least ten working days prior to
bid openings.
B.
Where substitution of materials alters space requirement indicated on the drawings, submit
shop drawings indicating proposed layout of space, all equipment to be installed therein, and
clearances between equipment.
C.
Material shall be new and shall conform to the applicable standard or standards where such
have been established for the particular material in question. Publications and standards of the
organization listed below are applicable to materials specified herein.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Underwriters’ Lab (UL)
National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA)
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
Edison Electric Institute (EEI)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
E.
Material of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer.
All cost incurred by the acceptance of substitutions shall be borne by the contractor. Proof
for substitution shall be by the contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP:
A.
Work shall be neatly, orderly, and securely installed with conduits, panels, boxes, switches,
etc., perpendicular and/or parallel with the principle structural members. Exposed raceways shall
be offset where they enter surface mounted equipment. Wiring installed in panels and other
enclosures shall be looped and laced and not wadded or bundled.
3.2
TESTS:
A.
At final inspection, a test will be made and the entire system shall be shown to be in proper
working order as per these specifications and the approved drawings.
B.
Provide instruments, labor and materials for any essential intermediate and final testing.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
16010-4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
C.
Equipment covers (i.e., panelboard trims, motor controls, device plates, and junction box
covers) shall be removed, as directed, for inspection of internal wiring. All circuits throughout
project shall be energized and shall be tested for operation and equipment connections in
compliance with contract requirements. Accessible ceiling shall be removed, as directed, for
inspection of equipment installed above ceilings.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION:
A.
Identify each device such as circuit breakers, panelboards, controllers, etc. with enamel or
lacquer letters using machine cut stencils with ½" minimum letters, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Identify circuits contained within junction boxes on the cover of all junctions boxes.
3.4
CLEANING AND PAINTING:
A.
Oil, dirt, grease, and other foreign materials shall be removed from all raceways, fittings,
boxes, panelboard trims, and cabinets to provide a clean surface for painting. Scratched or marred
surfaces of lighting fixtures, panelboard and cabinet trims, switchboard, or other equipment
enclosures shall be touched up with paint furnished by the equipment manufacturers specifically for
that purpose. Painting in general is specified under other sections of the specifications.
B.
Trim covers for flush-mounted panelboards, telephone cabinets, pull boxes, junction boxes
and control cabinets shall not be painted unless specifically required by the architect. Where such
painting is required, trim covers shall be removed for painting. Under no conditions shall locks,
latches or exposed trim clamps be painted.
C.
Unless specifically indicated to the contrary, all painting shall be done under the "Painting"
section of these specifications.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
16010-5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 16100 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL:
A.
Provide complete conduit system including boxes, fittings and supports. Leave empty
conduits with fiber polyline pull cord. Conceal conduits except in unfinished spaces such as areas
without ceilings. Type MC cable shall be used for wiring concealed in walls serving receptacles
and switches. The MC wiring shall be extended from junction boxes mounted above the ceilings.
1.2
RACEWAYS:
A.
1.
Install conduits per the below requirements:
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): ferrous galvanized conduit.
Comply with Article #345 of the National Electrical Code.
Rigid steel conduit: ferrous galvanized conduit.
Comply with Article #346 of the National Electrical Code.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): ferrous galvanized conduit.
Comply with Article #348 of the National Electrical Code.
Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
Comply with Article #351 of the National Electrical Code.
Flexible metal conduit.
Comply with Article #350 of the National Electrical Code.
Rigid nonmetallic conduit: Polyvinyl Chloride Schedule 40 (PVC)conduit.
Comply with Article #346 of the National Electrical Code.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Coordinate raceways with the mechanical ductwork and plumbing work installed in the job,
1.3
OUTLETS:
A.
Location of Outlets: located diagrammatically on the drawings. Refer to the architectural and
mechanical plans for the exact location of outlets. Locate outlets so that they will be symmetrical
with architectural details. Locate power outlets to serve the equipment. The location of any outlet
may be moved ten feet before it has been installed without additional expense to the owner.
1.4 SIGNS:
A.
Provide identification to the following electrical equipment with permanently attached
phenolic plates with 1/4" white engraved lettering on the face of each, attached with two
sheet metal screws. Plates must use color code identification. Identification plates also,
shall identify the panel name and branch of the electrical system.
Main switchboard and individual devices installed therein:
Panelboards
Safety Switches and Disconnects
Contactors and Motor Starters
Transfer Switches
Individually Mounted Circuit Breakers
Relays
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS:
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16100-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
A.
Conductors: Copper, 600 volt type THHN/THWN insulation except where noted on drawings.
Conductors installed where fixtures are used as raceway shall be 90oC Type THHN or
XHHN.
B.
Branch circuits: minimum #12 AWG solid copper except for motor leads, which shall be a
minimum #12 AWG stranded copper, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
C.
Color code three phase system branch circuit and feeder conductors: No. 8 AWG and
smaller as follows:
1.
D.
2.2
208Y/120 volt
a.
Phase A: Black
a.
Phase B: Red
b.
Phase C: Blue
c.
Neutral: White
d.
Ground: Green
MC Cable: Copper conductors with THHN insulation, steel armor, green grounding
conductor, 600 volt.
PULLBOXES:
B.
Pull boxes: code gauge galvanized sheet steel, per Article 370 of the National Electrical
Code, for the number, size and position of conduits entering the box, size of box and
maximum number of conductors in a box.
2.3
OUTLET BOXES:
A.
Provide outlet boxes for each lighting fixture and for each device. Boxes shall not be smaller
than specifically indicated herein and shall be larger if required by Article 370 of the National
Electrical Code for the number and size of conductors installed. Where lighting fixtures are
installed in continuous rows, only one outlet box shall be required unless otherwise noted on
drawings.
2.4
RECEPTACLES AND WALL SWITCHES:
A.
Receptacles and wall switches: the type and size indicated on the drawings. Equal by
Bryant, Eagle or P & S.
1.
Switches shall be 20 amp 120/277 volt specification grade. Number of poles: as
indicated on drawings.
2.
Duplex outlets shall be 20 amp 125 volt AC 3 wire specification grade straight blade.
3.
Single outlets shall be 20 amp 125 volt AC 3 wire specifications grade straight blade.
B.
Device plates: one piece single or multi-gang type selected to match the specific device or
combination of devices. Devices flush mounted in exposed masonry construction shall be jumbo
type. Device plates for surface mounted devices shall be used with the type of outlet or outlet box
in which the device is mounted. Provide devices installed in areas exposed to the weather with a
weatherproof device plate. Device plates shall be metal.
C.
Finishes: See Architectural Plans for finish of Switch handles, Device faces, and Flush
mounted cover plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16100-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Type MC cable shall be used for all branch circuit wiring in inaccessible areas. EMT steel
conduit shall be used for all branch circuit homeruns and feeders.
B.
MC cable shall be run from homerun junction boxes to devices, switches, and light fixtures in
inaccessible areas.
C.
Rigid steel conduit shall be used for raceways run exposed on exterior of building, in slabs
on grade, or in poured concrete walls or columns.
D.
Non-Metallic Conduit shall be used for raceways run underground and where non-metallic
conduit or plastic conduit (PVC) is specified herein or shown on the drawings.
E.
All conduit and MC cable shall be run concealed unless otherwise directed or indicated on
the drawings. Concealed conduit shall be run in walls and above ceilings.
F.
Conduit shall be run below grade or in the slab where indicated.
G.
Circuits above accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT conduit.
H.
MC cable shall not be installed above accessible ceilings. MC cable shall not be installed
exposed.
3.2 RACEWAYS
A.
Install exposed conduits parallel or at right angles to existing walls, ceilings, and structural
members. Support exposed conduits at not more than ten foot intervals and within three feet of
outlets, junction boxes, cabinets and fittings. Support individual runs of conduits by one hole
conduit straps. Support groups of conduits on ½" x ½" fourteen gauge channel. Kindorf, Unistrut,
or Powers, suspended from structure with 3/8" threaded steel rods with spring steel conduit
supporters. Attach rods to structure with swivel type clamps. Support individual runs of exposed
conduits attached to structural steel by beam clamps. Where conduits must pass through
structural members obtain approval of architect with respect to location and size of hole prior to
drilling.
B.
Support concealed branch circuit conduits at intervals not exceeding ten feet and within
three feet of each outlet, junction box, cabinet or fitting. Attach individual branch circuit conduits to
structural steel members with spring steel type conduit clips and to non-metallic structural members
with one hole conduit straps. Where branch circuit conduits must be suspended below structure,
support conduits by trapeze type support of exposed conduits. Attach concealed feeder conduits
larger than one inch trade diameter above ceiling to structure on intervals not exceeding twelve feet
with conduit beam clamps, one hole conduit straps or trapeze type support in accordance with
conditions encountered. Do not attach conduits to channels of ceiling suspension system or
suspension wires.
C.
Attach conduit support device to structure with wood screws on wood, toggle bolts on hollow
masonry, lead shield on solid masonry and machine bolts, clamps, or spring steel clips on steel.
Nails are not acceptable.
D.
Attach rigid conduit to sheet metal enclosures with two bonding type lock nuts and insulated
bushing. EMT connectors and couplings shall be steel set screw type and manufactured by
Thomas and Betts or Appleton. Connectors shall be of the insulated throat type. Terminate rigid
conduit stub ups not attached to enclosure with steel insulated throat, grounding type bushing.
Connectors and couplings shall be approved for the purpose.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16100-3
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
E.
Provide expansion fittings in feeder conduits where conduits pass through building
expansion joints. Conduits penetrating rated fire walls or rated fire floors shall be installed with
devices to maintain the fire rating of the wall or floor penetrated. Use O.Z. Gedney "Fire-Seal" or
approved equal. Contractor shall caulk holes on both sides of smoke walls where conduits
penetrate.
F.
Protect conduits against dirt, plaster, and foreign debris with conduit plugs. Plugs shall
remain in place until masonry work is complete.
G.
Seal conduits entering buildings from below grade with fiber and insulating electrical putty to
prevent entrance of moisture.
H.
Use conduit seals where noted on drawings and per Article #300-5 and #300-7 of the
National Electrical Code. Crouse-Hinds Type "EYS", Appleton Type "EYF" or O.Z. Gedney Type
"EY" or "EYA".
I.
Flexible conduit shall comply with the above and below specifications.
1.
Use flexible conduit connection to vibrating equipment, electric duct heaters, unit
heaters and rotating machinery, and for connection from junction box to
corresponding recessed lighting fixture.
2.
Flexible liquid tight conduit connecting motors, duct heaters, unit heaters and other
electrical equipment subject to vibration shall not exceed eighteen inches in length.
3.
Flexible metal conduit from outlet box to recessed lighting fixture shall not exceed six
feet in length.
4.
Flexible conduit used for other than connections to lighting fixtures shall not be less
than one-half inch trade size and in no case shall flexible conduit size be less than
permitted by the National Electrical Code for the number and size of conductors to be
installed therein. Three-eights inch flexible conduit may be used for connection to
lighting fixtures providing conduit fill requirements of National Electrical Code are not
exceeded.
5.
Maintain ground continuity through flexible conduit with green equipment grounding
conductor; do not use flexible conduit for ground continuity.
6.
When exposed to weather, when specifically indicated, or when installed in areas
subject to moisture, flexible conduit shall be liquid tight type.
7.
Connectors for flexible conduit shall be the insulated throat type. When used with
liquid type flexible conduit, connectors shall be of the screw-in ground cone type.
3.3
PULL OR JUNCTION BOXES:
A.
Provide pull boxes where specifically indicated and where required to facilitate the
installation of conductors. Install pull boxes exposed only in unfinished spaces, unless otherwise
specifically indicated, and install to be fully accessible.
B.
Where pull boxes are installed in finished spaces, boxes shall be flush mounted, with trim,
hinged door and flush latch and lock to match panel trim for flush mounted electrical panel.
Surface mounted boxes shall be Type "FD" with blank covers.
C.
Pull boxes required for horizontal feeders containing more than one feeder shall be provided
with reinforced flange and removable 12 gauge ½" x ½" galvanized channel for support of
conductors. Wood supports within pull boxes are not acceptable.
D.
Splices shall not be permitted in pull boxes except when specifically approved in writing by
the architect or where specifically shown on the drawings. Where splices are permitted, splices
shall be made with splicing sleeves attached to conductors with hydraulic crimping tool. Split bolt
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16100-4
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
connectors are not acceptable for splices within pull boxes.
E.
F.
Feeders within pull boxes shall be individually laced with nylon tie straps of the type with
enlarged tab to permit identification of each feeder within pull box.
Minimum pull or junction box size shall be 4 11/16" square by 2 1/8" deep.
G.
Mark on the coverplate of the junction box the circuit numbers of the circuits in that box.
Marking may be made with permanent markers, in legible writing.
3.4
OUTLET BOXES:
A.
Outlet boxes for surface mounted and pendant mounted lighting fixtures shall be 4" octagon
boxes, 1-1/2" deep.
B.
Outlet boxes for flush mounted lighting fixtures shall be 4" square boxes 2 1/8" deep, with
blank cover installed adjacent to fixture. Box shall be accessible when fixture is removed.
Connection to fixture shall be with flexible conduit and fixture wire.
C.
Outlet boxes for switches, receptacles and wall mounted junction boxes shall be 4" square
boxes 2-1/2" deep with square edge cover. Where only one conduit enters box, 3 ½" deep single
gang switch box may be used. Outlet boxes shall be set to within 1/8" of finished wall.
D.
Outlet boxes for switches and receptacles in exposed wiring system shall be “FD” boxes with
matching device plate.
E.
Outlet boxes for individual switches, and receptacles flush mounted in exposed concrete
block shall be single gang masonry boxes 3 ½" deep, set to within 1/8" of finished block.
F.
Where special purpose device specified requires larger outlet box than specified herein,
provide outlet box suitable for specific device. These outlet boxes shall be of the same type as
specified herein for the specific installation required.
G.
Where low voltage device is to be installed in common outlet box with line voltage device,
provide metal barrier within outlet box to establish two separate compartments.
H.
Outlet boxes used for support of surface mounted incandescent lighting fixtures shall be
provided with fixture stud. Boxes shall be supported by light weight channel spanning between and
attached to main ceiling support member. Attach channel to ceiling support members with
galvanized tie wire or nylon tie straps.
I.
Outlet boxes shall not be used for support of fluorescent fixtures, boxes shall be used only
as junction boxes.
J.
Outlet boxes for use with communication, alarm and signal systems are specified with
specific systems.
K.
Review architectural and interior drawings for areas where outlets occur within specific
architectural or structural features and install outlets as shown on architectural drawings, or, if not
shown, accurately center and align boxes within the architectural feature or detail.
L.
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, switches and receptacles shall be mounted with
bottom of device, the distances indicated herein, above the finished floor except where finished
walls are exposed concrete block, in which case height shall be adjusted to allow outlet box for
device to be mounted at block joint. Review architectural drawings for any device requiring specific
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16100-5
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
location. Mounting heights for devices shall be as follows (unless noted otherwise):
1.
Wall Switches: 48"
2.
Wall Receptacles: 18"
3.
Receptacles above counter tops: 4" above back splash with major axis horizontal
4.
Telephone and Computer Outlets: 18"
M.
N.
Devices shall be mounted within outlet boxes to allow device plates to be in contact with wall
on sides. Devices shall be accurately aligned with major axis of device parallel to adjacent
predominate building feature.
Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of doors.
3.5
CONDUCTORS:
A.
Feeder and branch circuit conductors No. 6 AWG and larger shall be phase identified in
each accessible enclosure by 1" wide plastic tape attached to conductors in a readily visible
location. Tape colors shall match color requirements specified herein.
B.
Branch circuit conductors shall be connected as indicated on the drawings. Common
neutrals and ground wires may be pulled in conduits where only opposite phase conductors are
run. Conduits shall have a ground wire pulled and shall comply with Article 250 of the National
Electrical Code.
C.
Conductors within enclosures, i.e., panels, terminal cabinets, control cabinets shall be
grouped and laced with nylon tie straps. Conductors within pull boxes shall be grouped and
identified with nylon tie straps with circuit identification tag.
D.
Splices in conductors shall be made only within junction boxes, wiring troughs and other
enclosures as permitted by the National Electrical Code. Do not splice conductors in panelboards,
safety switches, or motor control enclosures. Splices in conductors No. 10 AWG or smaller shall
be made with Skotchlok insulated spring connectors, Ideal wing nuts, or Ideal steel crimp
connectors with wrap-cap insulating caps. Splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be
made with split bolt connectors taped with No. 88 plastic electrical tape or Ideal Type GP or GT tap
connectors and insulating cover unless splices are specifically indicated to be made with crimping
sleeve applied to conductors with hydraulic operated crimping tool.
E.
Conductors used only for 120 volt control wiring systems shall be minimum No. 14 AWG
stranded type MTW 600 volt insulation. Control conductors to be J.I.C. color coded. Where control
conductors terminate on terminal strip, make termination with lug applied to conductor with
crimping tool.
F.
Maintain phase rotation established at service equipment throughout entire project.
G.
Pull Wires: 500# minimum test continuous fiber polyline.
END OF SECTION
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16100-6
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 16400 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL:
A.
Provide electrical distribution equipment as specified, scheduled or indicated on the
approved drawing and these specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS:
A.
Panelboards: bolt-in circuit breaker type with a rated main breaker or rated main lugs only as
noted on drawings. Interrupting capacity as shown on plans. Multiple breaker shall be
common trip type only. Provide GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter) breakers where
indicated. Panels shall be fully rated, no series ratings are acceptable.
B.
End and side gutter shall have minimum clearance as required by the NEC. Depth shall be
5 3/4" minimum.
C.
Approved manufacturers are: Square D, Cutler-Hammer and Siemens - ITE.
D.
Main lugs of panels or main circuit breaker shall be UL listed for copper or aluminum
conductors. Lugs shall be of the proper range for feeder conductors indicated on the
drawings.
E.
Panels throughout project shall be keyed alike.
F.
Provide circuit breakers with trip rating class and poles as indicated on the drawings. Class
indicated is designation according to Federal Specification W -C-375b and indicates the
frame size and interrupting rating required. Operation of multiple breakers shall be by single
handle; tie handles are not acceptable.
G.
Circuit breakers used for the control of discharge lighting shall be designated for the purpose
and bear the marking "SWD".
2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A.
Provide Heavy Duty, Load Break type Fusible or Non-Fusible disconnect switches for all
motors located out of sight of motor controller and where specifically indicated on the
drawings. Disconnect switches shall disconnect all underground conductors. When
exposed to weather, enclosure shall be NEMA 3R (Raintight); otherwise, enclosure shall be
NEMA-1. Switches shall be installed to be fully accessible in accordance with Article 110-16
of the National Electrical Code.
B.
Disconnect switches for single phase motors shall be horsepower rated, motor switches
without overload protection, voltage rating as per motor nameplate voltage or greater.
C.
Fusible disconnect switch shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors and shall be supplied
with the proper sized fuse clips and fuses. Fuse size over frame size will be noted on
drawings. Fuses shall be current limiting low peak dual element Type RK-1 fuses.
D.
Disconnect switches shall be Square D, Siemens - ITE or Cutler Hammer. All disconnect
ELECTRICAL SERVICE & DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
16400-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
switches shall be identified in accordance with the "Identification" section of these
specifications and Article 110-22 of the National Electrical Code.
2.2
BACKBOARDS:
A.
Provide backboards for all panels and power distribution equipment and as required by the
local inspectors.
B.
Backboards: be made of 3/4" FRP grade plywood, supported by an angle iron frame painted
light gray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDATIONS:
A.
Install electrical distribution equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and these specifications.
3.2 PANELBOARDS:
A.
Identify each circuit protective device with numeral designation, cross referenced with
typewritten circuit directory on interior of panel door. Include a copy of each panel directory,
reflecting all field changes, in the bound data provided at the time of final inspection.
B.
Circuit breakers shall be numbered and connected to panel bus in the following sequence:
Circuit 1, Phase A; Circuit 3, Phase B; Circuit 5, Phase C. W here bus diagrams are
indicated on the drawings, breakers shall be positioned in panel to conform to diagrams;
otherwise, single pole breakers shall occupy top positions in panel with blank spaces in
lower positions and two and three pole breakers in betwe en.
C.
Conductors within panels shall be grouped and laced with nylon tie straps. Splicing of
conductors within panels is not acceptable. Only one conductor shall be installed under
terminal of individual circuit breaker.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL SERVICE & DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
16400-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GROUNDING:
A.
Grounding shall comply with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code, state and local
codes, and the requirements of the utility company serving the site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.01 MATERIALS:
A.
Grounding conductor: copper sized in accordance with Articles 250-94 and 250-95 of the
National Electrical Code.
PART 3 - GROUNDING:
3.01 GROUNDING:
A.
Provide each panelboard with a copper equipment grounding bar brazed or riveted to the
associated enclosures or cabinet and an insulated neutral bar. Braze the related feeder and
branch circuit grounding conductors to the grounding bar or connected with pressure connector.
The initial panelboard of each separate system served from a system source or dry type
transformer shall have an insulated neutral bar interconnected with the grounding bar to establish
the system common ground point.
B.
Ground motors by drilling and tapping the bottom of the motor junction box and attaching the
conductor to the box with a round head bolt used for no other purpose. Conductor attachment shall
be through the use of a lug attached to conductor with crimping tool.
C.
Install a grounding conductor in power and lighting conduit installations. All circuit grounding
conductors shall be sized per Article 250 of the National Electrical Code.
END OF SECTION
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16100-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
Select lighting fixtures from those fixtures included in the fixture schedule. Request for
fixtures other than those listed in the fixtures schedule must be submitted in writing at least ten
working days prior to opening of bids to the architect with copy to engineer.
B.
Request for fixture substitution must be accompanied by construction specifications,
photometric test data including foot lambert reading, and complete dimensions. Data for exterior
lighting luminaries must also contain isocandle curves and average lumen distribution data.
C.
Select fixtures from the fixture schedule not only by catalog number, but with consideration
to mounting, number and types of lamps, and reference notes as contained in the fixture schedule
and/or drawings.
D.
Lamps shall be provided for fixtures in accordance with fixture schedule and/or
manufacturer’s recommendations.
E.
Plaster frames shall be provided for recessed fixtures as required when installed into gyp
ceilings.
F.
Verify fixture numbers, before placing order, to assure that fixtures will be furnished with
proper frames, fitting, and devices for installation in the ceiling system which is to be installed.
G.
Lighting shall be controlled by building EMS system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BALLASTS:
A.
Ballasts provided with fixtures shall be ETL-CBM approved, high power factor, with UL label.
Ballasts for rapid start lamps shall be Premium Class P. Ballasts for T-8 lamps shall be electronic.
Ballasts shall be for the voltage of the circuit to which connected. Ballasts shall be provided for
fluorescent and high intensity discharge lamps. Ballasts shall not be less than or equal to 10%
THD.
B.
Fluorescent fixtures exposed to outside temperatures shall be provided with 0 degree
ballasts.
2.2
LAMPS
A.
Provide all lamps for lights on this project.
B.
Lamps shall be Philips, Sylvania or General Electric.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
GENERAL:
Install lighting fixtures in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as herein
LIGHTING FIXTURES
16500-1
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
specified, or as indicted on the drawings.
B.
Hang fluorescent fixtures suspended from ceiling joist by means of fixture chain and
approved light support supplied by light manufacturer. Two supports are required for each four (4)
foot fixture.
C.
Surface and wall mounted emergency lights are to be hung as per approved manufacturers
methods for each light.
D.
Ceiling grids shall not be used for the sole support of recessed, lay-in type fixtures. Each
lay-in type, recessed fixture shall be independently supported from the structure by two #10 hanger
wires installed on diagonal corners of the fixture.
E.
Provide integral test switch as part of the fixture for lighting fixtures with emergency battery
units. Do not use remote test switches.
F.
Provide U.L. "FR" Label for recessed lighting fixtures mounted in fire rated ceilings.
Construct a fire rated enclosure around the fixture housings using fire rated acoustical ceiling tile.
END OF SECTION
LIGHTING FIXTURES
16500-2
GEORGIA DOL WARM SPRINGS CAREER CENTER
BCB1011
SECTION 16750 - MISC. SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
Provide empty conduit systems as indicated on the drawings and as required by the
Telephone Company and Data Systems provider.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT
A.
2.2
OUTLET BOXES
A.
2.3
Conduit shall be as specified under Section 16100 – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.
Outlet boxes shall be as specified under Section 16100 – BASIC MATERALS AND
METHODS
BACKBOARD
A.
Backboards shall be U.S. Plywood or approved equal of minimum 3/4 inch thickness, grade
A/D minimum, and installed with good side exposed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION:
A.
Conduits shall contain a nylon pull wire.
B.
Provide pullboxes with blank cover plate minimum every 100 feet as directed by Telephone
Company.
C.
The telephone service shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. Coordinate with the
Telephone Company so that the entire system is installed in accordance with the Telephone
Company standards and policies.
D.
Permanently and securely install backboards and paint with two coats of gray paint on both
sides prior to the installation of any equipment.
E.
Provide (1) #6 awg ground wire to each telephone backboard location. The wire shall be
connected to the electrical building grounding system.
END OF SECTION
MISC. SYSTEMS
16750-1